Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Sharp - MX M282N M362N MX M452N M502N
Sharp - MX M282N M362N MX M452N M502N
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM503/S4E
MX-M283 N
MX-M363 N/U
MX-M453 N/U
MX-M503 N/U
MX-M282N/M362N 1
MODEL MX-M452N/M502N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING ● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND [C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . 4-1 [E] PAPER FEED SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
[5] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 [F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . . . . . F-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND [G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
TROUBLE CODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION . . . . . H-1
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
[8] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA
[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[L] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . .M-1
[11] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[O] PWB SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[13] TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . Q-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only)
It may cause a breakdown.
11-13/16"
• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit, and the Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
fusing unit Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
copy and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Drum unit)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights. Tapping screws (for iron)
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tightening Tightening Tightening
for a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
sheets of paper to cover it.) (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
eign material on the OPC drum surface. (Plate thickness
(Transfer unit) 0.8mm or above)
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
eign material on the transfer roller. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
(Developing unit)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- (Plate thickness
eign material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
(Fusing unit)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
1. System configuration
1 Paper exit system DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
16 AR-SC2 PAPER PASS UNIT
8 MX-RBX3
FINISHER PUNCH MODULE STAND/1 x 500 SHEET STAND/2 x 500 SHEET
14 MX-FN11 15 MX-PNX6 PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
A/B/C/D
3 MX-DEX8 4 MX-DEX9 5 MX-LCX1
2. Machine configuration
1 MX-M363N/M453N/M503N MX-M283N MX-M363U/M453U/M503U MX-M282N/M362N/M452N/M502N
Copier STD STD STD
PCL printer STD OPT*1 STD
PS printer OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
Main body LCD COLOR WVGA 8.5" MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1" COLOR WVGA 7.0"
FAX OPT OPT OPT
Scanner STD OPT*1 STD
Filing (Print hold function) STD OPT*1 STD
HDD STD OPT*1 STD
DSPF STD — — —
RSPF — STD STD OPT
1 OC (Document cover) — — OPT
Automatic duplex STD STD STD
Security OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
Internet Fax OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option. OPT*1: Product key target. —: Cannot be connected.
3. Combination of options
MX-M283N MX-M282N
1 MX-M363U Product
MX-M363N MX-M362N
Section Name Model name MX-M453U key Remarks
MX-M453N MX-M452N
MX-M503U target
MX-M503N MX-M502N
Document cover/ 1 DOCUMENT COVER MX-VRX1 — —
1 Document feeder 2 REVERSING SINGLE MX-RP11 STD/—*5 STD
PASS FEEDER
Paper feed system 3 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET MX-DEX8
PAPER DRAWER
4 STAND/2 x 500 SHEET MX-DEX9
PAPER DRAWER
5 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX1 A4
Paper exit system 6 EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TRX2
7 FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher
8 PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RBX3
9 SADDLE STITCH MX-FN10
FINISHER
10 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX1A/B/C/D For inner finisher
11 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5A/B/C/D For saddle stitch finisher
12 STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SCX1 For finisher (MX-FNX9)/
For saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN10)
13 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3 For saddle
14 FINISHER MX-FN11
15 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX6A/B/C/D For finisher (MX-FN11)
16 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC2 For finisher (MX-FN11)
Printer expansion 17 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT MX-PB10 — —
WITHOUT HDD
18 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT MX-PB11 STD STD
WITH HDD
19 PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1
20 XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 *3 *3 *3 The expansion memory
board (MX-SMX3) is
required.
21 BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1
Image send 22 FACSIMILE EXPANSION MX-FXX2 *1 *1 *1
expansion KIT
23 STAMP UNIT AR-SU1
24 STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1
25 INTERNET FAX MX-FWX1 *4
EXPANSION KIT
26 ENHANCED MX-EBX3 —
COMPRESSION KIT
27 APPLICATION MX-AMX1 *4
INTEGRATION MODULE
28 NETWORK SCANNER MX-NSX1 STD STD
EXPANSION KIT
MX-M283N MX-M282N
1 MX-M363U Product
MX-M363N MX-M362N
Section Name Model name MX-M453U key Remarks
MX-M453N MX-M452N
MX-M503U target
MX-M503N MX-M502N
Authentication/ 29 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR14U *4 — Commercial version
Security (For the machine with HDD
installed)
30 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR14 *4 — Authentication version
1 (For the machine with HDD
installed)
31 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR15U — — Commercial version
(For the machine without
HDD installed)
32 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR15 — — Authentication version
(For the machine without
1
HDD installed)
33 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR24U — — Commercial version
Application/ 34 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE MX-USX1
Solution KIT
35 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE MX-USX5
KIT
36 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE MX-US10
KIT
37 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE MX-US50
KIT
38 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE MX-USA0
KIT
39 APPLICATION MX-AMX2 STD/*2 *4 For North America,
COMMUNICATION the SharpOSA Utility
MODULE CD-ROM is not provided.
40 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MX-AMX3 *4
MODULE
41 KEYBOARD MX-KBX2 STD/*2 — —
Memory 42 EXPANSION MEMORY MX-SMX3 This is required in case of
BOARD short in the memory
capacity due to print data.
When the XPS expansion
kit is installed, it is required
inevitably.
PLASMACLUSTER 43 PLASMACLUSTER ION MX-PC11
1 ION GENERATOR GENERATOR
44 PLASMACLUSTER ION MX-XB13
GENERATOR MOUNTING
KIT
B. MPE (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life Quantity in
No. Item Content 28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM Model Name collective Remarks
1
model model package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500BT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500NR 10
C. Asia/SRH
1 (MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N, MX-M363U/M453U/M503U, MX-M282N/M362N/M452N/M502N)
Life Quantity in
No. Item Content 28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM Model Name collective Remarks
1
model model package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500AT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500AR 10
D. Europe/Australia/New Zealand
1 (MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N, MX-M363U/M453U/M503U, MX-M282N/M362N/M452N/M502N)
Life Quantity in
No. Item Content 28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM Model Name collective Remarks
1
model model package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500GT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500GV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500GR 10
E. SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
1 (MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N, MX-M363U/M453U/M503U, MX-M282N/M362N/M452N/M502N)
Life Quantity in
No. Item Content 28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM Model Name collective Remarks
1
model model package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500FT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500AR 10
F. SESC (MX-M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name collective Remarks
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500CT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500CV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500CR 10
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand
Life
Model
No. Item Content Quantity 28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM Package Remarks
1 name
model model
1 Upper heat roller kit MX-503UH Upper heat roller 1 150K 200K 10
(200K kit) Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4
2 Lower heat roller kit MX-503LH Lower heat roller 1 150K 200K 10
(200K kit) Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2
3 Web cleaning kit MX-503WC Upper pressure roller bearing 2 150K 200K 10
Pressure roller 1
Web roller 1
4 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 150K 200K 10
Discharge plate 1
5 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 150K 200K 10
DV side seal F/R 1 pair
TN filter UN 2
6 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 150K 200K 10
Toner reception seal 1
Side seal F/R 1 pair
Drum separation pawl unit 4
MC unit 1
Side sheet F/R for toner reception seal 2
Molt cushion for side seal F/R 2
7 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5
8 Paper dust MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 150K 200K 10
removing unit
9 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 300K 400K 10
10 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher
(MX-FN11)
11 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch
finisher (MX-FN10)
12 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/
saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX9/FN10)
13 Finish stamp AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 — 20
cartridge
Developer/drum counter
28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM Developer/drum rpm
model model
Developer/drum 150K 200K 930K rotations
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Internal product name Destination Incompatibility
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows. A 3MX 500N T 1 A
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. B 00001 090210 B
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2. Production Serial No. Production Version
2: Alphabet place in production day year/month/day
Indicates the model conformity code. Example: 1st of production on February 10, 2009
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month. D. Environmental conditions
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number (Humidity)
Indicates the day of the production date. 85%
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing. 60%
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
20%
B. Developer 10 30 35
(Temperature)
BK
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C
conditions Humidity 65 5 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.
*: Peripheral device.
(8)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
D. Operation panel
1 (1) N model
HOME
LOGOUT
1
(2) U model
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (9) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
5 4 14 2 3 1
7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
CIS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD5 SPPD6 (SPOD)
4
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS
FAN
F. RSPF
(1) Internal structure
5 4 14 2 3 1
15 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD5
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS SRVC
SPRS
OCSW
MHPS CCD
TFD3
TFD2 POD3
HPOS
POD2
APPD1
POD1
WEB-END
TH_MY
TH_US
DSW_ADU
BD
PCS
TCS
TH_DV/HUD_DV APPD2
PPD2 MPED MPLD
TNBOX
MTOP1
TNF MPWD
MTOP2
PPD1
MPFD
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1 DSW_C
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23 CSPD2
CSS24
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW DSW-F
ADUGS
MPUC
CPFC2
MPFS
MPGS
PSPS
TDSC
CPUC1
CPFC1
CPUC2
OSM
ADUM_H
POM
WEBM
FUM
PGM
MIM DM
PFM
CPFM RRM
CLUM1
ADUM_L
CLUM2
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW
POFM1
POFM2
RDCFM OZFM
POFM3 1
LSUFM
CPUFAM PSFM2
2
2
PSFM1
M. PWB
14
14
15 15 9 9
13
12
27
27
11
MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N
13
14
15 8
10
12
27
22
23
26
7
16
5
4
19
20
18
28
17 6
24
25
29
3
N. Fuses/Thermostats
1 MX-M363/M453/M503 U
1 MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N
16
14
1 MX-M363/M453/M503 U
15
TS_UM
TS_US
10
13
11
12
8 6
7
1 9
2
3
4
5
34
35
33
32
36
37
24
25
27
26
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
22
23 21
31
30
5 19
17
18
4
6
15
16
8 14
40
7 41
12
13
9
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
3. Details of adjustment
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm in between 20mm - 40mm
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit from the edge of the developing doctor.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 20mm - 40mm
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
* When the print image density is low. 0.40 0.02mm.
* When there is a blur on the print image. * When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. developing doctor and the developing roller.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
NOTE: Do not hold the adjacent section of the MG roller strongly.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove 20mm 20mm
the developing unit upper cover. 40mm 40mm
2 㨪 3mm ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B.
$7'(9(92B.
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel- 2) Close the front cabinet and press [EXECUTE] button.
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.
7&9B.
12.0±0.5mm
. (;(&87(
Adjustment completed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing $7'(9($'-B.
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and $7'(9(92B.
. (;(&87(
Abnormal end
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&9B.(((/
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
. (;(&87(
NOTE: 10-key
EXECUTE
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment
EXECUTE
result is not reflected. or after 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
play.
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
NOTE: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25- 3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 1 of the high
2. voltage PWB and the GND.
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*
+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21
,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
$˖ %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
'˖ ˖7&+($9<%:'3;
(˖ ˖7&2+3%:
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*
+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21
,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21
(;(&87( 2.
2-D Transfer separation bias voltage ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image
adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
position, image magnification
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced. ratio, void area adjustments
* U2 trouble has occurred. (Manual adjustments)
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 3-A Print engine image skew adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 8-17 mode. (LSU parallelism adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
7(67
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387 * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
$˖ ˖3/9)$&(
$˖ %˖ ˖3/9%$&. 1) Enter the SIM 64-2 mode.
˷̚˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚̚
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
*˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
+˖ ˖'83/(;12
,˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$,1
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
(;(&87( 2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Set the set items to the values shown below.
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖3/9)$&( Item Setting value
$˖ %˖ ˖3/9%$&.
A 1
˷̚˹
B 1
C 254
D 255
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
2
A 4
1 3
Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
7) When the LSU unit fixing screw is attached to the hole position
on the lower side, remove the fixing screw and attach it to the
hole on the upper side.
Loosen the fixing screw which is attached to the adjustment
hole position on the upper side. Loosen the LSU fixing screw
(left).
(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
rectangle print pattern.
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
,˖ ˖68%0)7 * When the duplex section is disassembled.
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
/˖ ˖68%/&& * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
(;(&87( 2.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
* U2 trouble has occurred.
End of print * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
(Note)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 3B print
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direc-
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 tion) in advance.
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6 $˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
.˖ ˖68%&6 %˖ ˖0$,10)7
/˖ ˖68%/&&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
2. '˖ ˖0$,1&6
(;(&87(
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray. *˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll ,˖ ˖68%0)7
key. -˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
/˖ ˖68%/&&
The check pattern is printed out. (;(&87( 2.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
End of print
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
240 0.5mm )˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the trays, and select the set
item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
adjustment target paper feed tray.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
OK NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper
(˖ ˖55&%0)7 of all paper feed tray.
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
,˖ ˖'(1$ each paper tray.
-˖ ˖'(1%
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
.˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
that the void area is within the specified range.
2. Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
cedure 2).
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7 The adjustment pattern is printed.
-˖ ˖68%&6
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
rect position.
(;(&87( 2. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
EXECUTE all the following conditions are satisfied.
EXECUTE
End of print RV
2.0mm 2.0mm
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
Setting Default FV
Item/Display Content 2.0mm 2.0mm
range value
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100 RV: REAR VOID AREA
magnification ratio BK
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
value (Manual paper feed) RV + FV 4.0mm
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 RV = 2.0 2.0mm
value (Tray 1)
FV = 2.0 2.0mm
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2) If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
L = 10mm
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
La Lb
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
A A A
Ld Ld A
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.
(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
20mm
A4/Letter size
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much.
Yes
Adjust hinge D
until there is a
resistance in
section A.
(Counter- b) If it cannot be pulled out, loosen the fixing nut and turn the
clockwise)
section D clockwise to lift the DSPF/RSPF unit, and make an
adjustment.
If it can be pulled out without resistance, loosen the fixing nut
and turn the section D counterclockwise to move down the
Turn the hinge DSPF/RSPF unit, and make an adjustment.
D to lift the
DSPF/RSPF
so that
there is a
resistance in
the section A.
(Clockwise)
No
4.3 - 5.0mm
Is there a
Section F
resistance in the
section B?
Yes a
B
b
Is
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
End of the b
adjustment
A Paper pass direction If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)".
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3).
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjust-
ment screw section.
B
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
(Front side)
A B Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
1mm or less) is satisfied.
C D
7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in
the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
c d
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
2.
5) Check the image skew state, and shift the CIS mounting plate
to "L" or "R" direction to adjust.
L R
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 A
B
1.0mm 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
Copy image repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110 NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
shorter than tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
the original) ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures. 6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back
7) Remove the document table glass. surface mode)
8) Remove the dark box cover. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the * When the CIS unit is replaced.
CCD unit base as shown below.
* When the CIS unit is replaced.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
replaced.
adjusted.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that 2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced. is satisfactorily focused.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
direction) to change the installing position. steps.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the 3) Remove the rear frame and the front frame cabinet of the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter DSPF unit.
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. 4) Loosen the fixing screw of the focus adjustment plate. (About
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%. one turn)
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the On the front frame side and the rear frame side.
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
N model
A
B
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
2.
Copy magnifi-
cation ratio
(Original dimension - Copy dimension)
Original dimension
100% original
(Example 1)
Copy A
copy
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than 10 50 100 150 200 250
the original)
Scale
10 20 90 100 110 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
(Original)
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Example 2) If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
(Longer than
the original) If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 1.0%).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification $˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
%˖ ˖&&'68%
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. (˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
2.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 1.0%). Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
7-C Main scanning direction image A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
(DSPF/RSPF mode) B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: magnification ratio
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
surface magnification ratio
* When U2 trouble occurs. adjustment (Main scan)
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. D SPF(SUB) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
adjustment (Sub scan)
a. Adjustment procedures E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
adjustment (Main scan)
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF.
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. surface magnification ratio
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and adjustment (Sub scan)
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
Paper pass direction * Items B, D, F: When the set value is increased by 1, the
A4 size magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
the scroll key.
(Both the front surface
and the back surface) SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
10mm 10mm (Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. (Back surface)
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the )˖ ˖63)%68%
Paper pass direction * Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
A4 size magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Items B, D, F: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
obtained.
original
150
50
A'
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position, I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria
adjustment correction value
1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
3.0 2.0mm
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
[EXECUTE] key. $˖
$˖ ˖55&$
%˖ ˖55&%&6
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When *˖ ˖/($'
,˖ ˖'(1$
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed -˖ ˖'(1%
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied. 2.
(Manual adjustment) $˖
$˖ ˖55&$
%˖ ˖55&%&6
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. (˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
10-A Copy image position, image loss, void area *˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
adjustment (Document table mode) ,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1%
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: .˖ ˖)52175($5
2.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
* U2 trouble has occurred. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. edge edge reference
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. adjust- position (OC)
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
value motor Tray
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com- E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
pleted normally. ment paper feed
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
below. G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
value area adjustment
plate.
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead adjust- area adjustment
edge can be seen. J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
Image area
200%
5mm 10mm
Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
De- Standard
Item/ Adjustment When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
Content fault adjustment
Display range
value value position to the DSPF/RSPF scanning position is increased.
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0 When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is
adjustment image loss 1.0mm changed by 0.1mm.
adjustment Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0 obtained.
loss 1.0mm
adjustment NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ
10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is mode).
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
%˖ ˖6,'(
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
(Lead edge image loss adjustment) If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE procedure.
(SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
the following values. with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) (When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is loss is increased.)
increased.) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Copy image
Copy image
<<<%%%
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&
&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CIS gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1* &203/(7(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
Guide on the rear frame
6&$11(502725,61275($'<
(;(&87(
3/($6(&+(&.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
6+$',1*(;(&87,1*
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7
be sure to check to confirm that the related adjustments which SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
will affect the copy density and gradation have been properly
completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
(Items which will affect the copy density and gradation but are
not required to be adjusted frequently. However, they must be Patch 3 is copied.
6
ADJ CCD ADJ CIS gamma adjustment (CIS 63-3
11 calibration 11B calibration) (DSPF mode)
ADJ Shading adjustment 63-2
11C (Calibration) (DSPF mode)
work effectively.
On the other hand, the automatic copy density and gradation Are the density
NO
adjustment by the serviceman can be used to obtain normal and gradation at the
satisfactory level?
picture quality even tough the machine environment is greatly
changed. In addition, if there is a fatal problem on the machine,
repair and adjustment of the machine can provide normal YES
images.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy
density and gradation adjustment.
understood. (SIM46-16)
b. Note for execution of the auto copy density and gradation
adjustment *1:
If there is any streak or unclear
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. copy on the printed check pattern,
check the print engine for any
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
problems.
erly.
3) Set the adjustment pattern sheet on the document table, and
place 5 sheet of white paper on the adjustment pattern sheet. Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment.
Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern, and check the density.
YES
(;(&87(
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P
Q (Max)
Low density High density
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Patch C or D is slightly copied.
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
Patch A must not be copied.
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66 (Method 2)
Use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the servicing
color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or
UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode
(Manual) to check the copy density and gradation. (Refer to
the item of the copy density and gradation check.)
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory copy
density and gradation, use ADJ 12B manual adjustment (SIM
(;(&87(
46-16).
The copy density and gradation adjustment and the printer NOTE: For the U model where no printer option is installed, the
density and gradation adjustment are automatically performed, adjustment pattern for the printer is not printed.
and the copy check patch image and the printer check patch
image are printed. (One for each) Wait until the operation
panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment. (*1)
When the half-tone correction (process control) is completed, Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
"Please quit this mode" is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.
"OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is nor-
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment check pattern is
mally completed. printed.)
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the details of the half-tone
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check
correction are displayed. pattern.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 Are the density NO
7(67 &/26(
at the satisfactory
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17
level?
&203/(7(7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'( YES
2.RU1*
Cancel SIM 46-16.
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or servicing color
test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or
UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy
in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the density.
5(68/7 5(75<
'˖ ˖32,17 When SIM 46-24 is used to execute the automatic density and
(˖ ˖32,17 gradation adjustment, all the set values of this simulation are
)˖ ˖32,17
set to 500.
*˖ ˖32,17
Q (Max)
Low density High density
(;(&87(
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
not be reversed. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Patch C or D is slightly copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted on the request
from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color bal-
ance stated above.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the following
procedures.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
5(68/7 $˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
&203/(7( ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
5(68/7 (;(&87(
/2: +,*+
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. 2.
12-C Copy density in each copy mode 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(Overall density adjustment) When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: mode and change the adjustment value.
* When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den- When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
sity and high density part at each copy mode individually. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the density is decreased.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result
copy mode individually. Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
* U2 trouble has occurred. nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-2) and the
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
obtained.
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
(;(&87( increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
$872 sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
adjusted.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@ That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
printed out.
)˖ ˖32,17
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
.˖ ˖32,17 referring to this adjustment pattern. However, it is more practi-
/˖ ˖32,17
cally to make a copy and check it.
'3, '3, (;(&87( 2.
'˖ ˖32,17 * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
(˖ ˖32,17
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 image of the document.
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
* U2 trouble has occurred.
-˖ ˖32,17 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
.˖ ˖32,17
[SYSTEM
EXECUTE
EXECUTE SETTINGS] key
or end of print
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
(˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
*˖ ˖)$;˖2&
+˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
,˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
10-key DEFAULT
2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
2) Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: DSPF/RSPF"
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
%˖ ˖*5DWLR
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. ˷̚˹
%˖ ˖*5DWLR
˷̚˹
C SCAN: OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX: OC FAX mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX: RSPF FAX mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
increased, the copy density of red images is decreased. When (˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖+,*+
%˖ ˖6&$16,'($˖/2:
low density area and the high density area) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖/2:
It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. In the fol- )˖ ˖)$;6,'($˖+,*+
* When the copy density in the DSPF mode is too low or too high.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. Item Button Display Content
Setting Default
range value
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
* When the DSPF CIS unit is replaced. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
* When U2 trouble occurs. LOW (Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
HIGH (High density side)
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$˖ ˖&23<6,'(%˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖6&$16,'(%˖/2:
'˖ ˖&23<6,'(%˖+,*+
(˖ ˖6&$16,'(%˖+,*+
)˖ ˖)$;6,'(%˖+,*+
*˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖5
+˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖*
,˖ ˖%$/$1&(6,'(%˖%
2& '63) 2.
'˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
* When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.
2. b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
10-key
OK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ˷̚˹
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;˖/2:
'˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
2.
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
A COPY: LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 7(67
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
adjustment (Low density side) $˖ ˖<(612
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P
Q (Max)
Low density High density
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check (˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
Are the density NO .˖ ˖32,17
at the satisfactory /˖ ˖32,17
level? (;(&87( 2.
YES
EXECUTE EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Check the printer density and gradation adjustment result. 7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
YES
(;(&87( 2.
End
*1:
If satisfactory density is not obtained with the
adjustment, check the print engine for any problems.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density $(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
Patch A or B is slightly copied.
Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
mode
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Stop (for copy)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must Stop (for FAX)
not be reversed. AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Patch A or B is slightly copied. Stop (for scanner)
When, however, the density and the gradation are adjusted on AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
the request by the user, there is no need to set to the standard setting NORMAL
density and gradation stated above. SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
4) Select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99). MODE2: Normal gamma
When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic density, all the STOP:
set values of this simulation are set to 50. Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To document, decides the output image density according to
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. the density of that part. (The output image density is con-
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis- stant at whole area.)
fied. REALTIME:
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the decides the output image density according to the density
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. of each part of the document. (The output image density
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient may be not constant at whole area.)
way of adjustment. AE WIDTH FULL:
6) Cancel SIM 67-25. Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
(leading edge of document) x Document width. No relation-
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
ship to PRESCAN MODE
density and gradation.
AE WIDTH PART:
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
The print test pattern is printed.
(leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relation-
ship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in auto copy mode:
ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure When the density of the document of the read area is light,
mode operating conditions in output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
copy, scan, and FAX image density is decreased by control.
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
ment density in auto copy mode.
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
ment, change the setting.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a copy with correct density is not obtained in auto mode.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
AE WIDTH = FULL
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
3 to 7mm %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
DSPF mode %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
3 to 7mm
EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper 2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width
feed guide is recognized. position.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
adjustment
(Document table mode)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
(;(&87(
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred. EXECUTE
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&. Adjustment
2&6: 3' 3' 3' (;(&87(
failed
3' 3' 3' 3'
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
(;(&87(
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen 0)7 &6 &6
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
Item/Display Content
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
ADJ paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( guide.
%.0$*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'-
%.0$*ǂ$'-
6(78335,17ǂ$'-
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
5(68/7 '$7$ The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button. 18-C Copy lead edge image reference position
3) Select [ALL] with the key button. adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
&/26(
automatic adjustment
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7
(Document table mode)
$// 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
(Note)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
0)7 &6 &6
(;(&87(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 18-D Copy image off-center, image lead edge
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. position, sub scanning direction image
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. magnification ratio automatic adjustment
(Any direction)
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
guide.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the * To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns again. * To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). 11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
reading and calculating DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns * To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
(for the front side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side. ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading DSPF/RSPF adjust- Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ment patterns (for the back side). ing cases, perform this adjustment.
<Adjustment item list> * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
• DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
• DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)
paper rear edge section.
• DSPF/RSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (front
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two
side)
position in the front/rear frame direction.
8) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
RSPF.
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON Program key ON Asterisk (*) key ON
CLEAR key ON Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
When canceling the current simulation mode to change the
main code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 1
START (Copy mode)
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 2
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit Automatic document feeder
section and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control Automatic document feeder
circuit.
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control Finisher
circuit.
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and their control Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
circuits.
3 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 Used to check the operation of the paper transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation unit (Operation/Display Control PWB)
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
solenoids) and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan and its control circuit. Others
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Fusing
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Automatic document feeder
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the Toner supply, developing
control circuit.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode Photo-conductor
and the control circuit.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Transfer
17 Used to check and adjust the operation of the separation bias voltage and the control circuit.
9 2 Used to check the operation of the sensors and detectors in the switchback section (duplex Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
section) and the control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its Duplex
control circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the related Toner supply, developing
circuit.
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. MFP (ICU) PWB
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5" trouble. Fusing
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to display the print count value of each section and the operation mode.
2 Used to display the number of total mis-feed and the number of troubles.
3 Used to display the mis-feed position and the number of mis-feed at the position.
4 Used to display the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to display the ROM version of each unit (section).
6 Used to print information on various settings, adjustments, counters, controls, and versions.
8 Used to display the number of operations (the counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF/RSPF,
and scanning (reading).
9 Used to display the print quantity of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
10 Used to display the system configuration (options and internal hardware).
11 Used to display the use frequency of send/receive of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed.) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
12 Used to display the mis-feed position of the DSPF/RSPF and the number of mis-feed at the Automatic document feeder
position.
13 Used to display the use quantity of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to display various counter values related to scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed.
80 Used to output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
transport section.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 3
Main Sub Functions Section
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
unit.
5 Used to clear the developer counter. Toner supply, developing
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. Photoconductor
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode (Web page) password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section, and to display the toner density Toner supply, developing
detection level.
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. Toner supply, developing
(Automatic adjustment)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit operation from the right side. Paper exit section
2 Used to set the paper type and the weight type. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x 17") print.
6 Used to set the specifications of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK
versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
35 Used to set the trouble history display mode.
38 Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the
consumable part life is over.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the
center binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set the operation specifications and functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation, density adjustment) in the
copy mode.
65 Used to set the limit of the staple process.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Used to adjust the image loss (shade removal amount) in the poster, the continuous
enlargement copy, the card scan, and the A3 wide copy mode.
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel mode.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number.
(FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain
adjustment retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry
number history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density and the half-tone process control error history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
section and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
the control circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of card. (HDD-installed machine only) Others
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 4
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 5
Main Sub Functions Section
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to install and update the Operation Manual data stored in the HDD. (N model only)
5 Used to install and update the watermark data stored in the HDD.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (simple adjustment).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode).
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode) (simple
adjustment).
10 Used to adjust the image off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send
mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image
magnification ratio.
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
DSPF/RSPF resist roller.
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF/RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document size width sensor. Automatic document feeder
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF/RSPF mode document scan Automatic document feeder
position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM.
(Used to repair the PWB.) (HDD-installed machine)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication
data and address data) to the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory. MFP (ICU) PWB
2 Used to set the specifications of the MFP PWB on-board SDRAM. MFP (ICU) PWB
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power LSU
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). HDD
* If no HDD is installed, the MFP Flash memory is formatted.
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). HDD
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). HDD
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. HDD
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. HDD
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area) HDD
10 Used to delete the job log data. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
11 Used to delete the document filing data. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. HDD
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual and watermark area) HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading. Scanner
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Scanner
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma default setting. Scanner
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer function.
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
5 Used to check the operation panel key input. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
67 17 Printer controller reset
25 Printer density adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer option
function.
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value (Half-tone process control data).
33 Used to adjust the gamma and the density in each printer screen.
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer option
function.
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section.
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP (ICU) PWB
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 6
3. Details of simulation 1-5
Purpose Operation test/check
1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1-1 Section Scanner (reading)
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
(reading) unit and the control circuit. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner (reading) Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
Operation/Procedure resolution (operation speed).
1) Select the operation resolution (scan speed) with the touch When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
panel key.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the 400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
scan resolution (operation speed). 600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s)
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s) 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s) 2&6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
2
2-1
1-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner matic document feed unit and the control
(reading) section and the related circuits. circuit.
Section Scanner Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The DSPF/RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution
6&$11(56(1625&+(&. (operation speed).
MHPS
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
[DSPF]
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 7
[DSPF]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)$*,1*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$1 ˖ 300DPI '3, '3,
63)6(1625&+(&.ǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂǂ6:'B/(1
6('B$'
66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
[RSPF] [RSPF]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 2-3
63)$*,1*
63)6&$1 ˖ '3, '3, '3,
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feed unit and
the control circuit.
6,1*/( '28%/( (;(&87(
Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
2-2
key.
Purpose Operation test/check 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- The selected load performs the operation.
sors and the detectors in the document
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
feed unit section and the control circuits.
Section [DSPF-installed model]
Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure SPUM DSPF paper feed motor
SPFM DSPF transport motor
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch
played.
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
STMPS Stamp solenoid
are highlighted. (Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 8
FDTPD EMPS Delivery tray paper detector
FPLD FSLD Paper surface detector
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
FPPD2 FFPD Paper transport detector 2
63)287387&+(&.
6380 63)0
FSPHS FFHPD Saddle plate home position sensor
655& 63))$1 FSTPD FFED Saddle exit tray paper detector
67036 FSMRS FFE Saddle motor rotation sensor
FTULD FULD Tray upper limit detector
(;(&87( FTLLD FLLD Tray lower limit detector
FTLMRS FLE Tray lift motor rotation sensor
FSHS FSHPD Staple home position sensor
FSSHPS FSTHPD Stapler shift home position sensor
3 FSED
FSLS
FSD
FSPD
Staple empty detector
Staple lead edge sensor
FTPS FMLD Tray position sensor
3-2 FCD1 FFDD Cover detector 1
FCD2 FCD Cover detector 2
Purpose Operation test/check
FSSW1 FFDDW Safety switch 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- FCD FJSW Finisher connection detector
sors and the detectors in the finisher and FSSSW1 FSSSW Staple safety switch
the control circuit. FFL FFANLK Fan lock signal
Section Finisher FDRHS FNHPD Delivery roller home position sensor
Operation/Procedure FPPD3 FSPOD Paper transport detector 3
FSATPD FSDTPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
FSSSW2 FSJPD Stapler safety switch 2
played.
FPHHD FPHHPD Paper hold home position sensor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
FSAPHS FSJHPD Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
are highlighted.
FSPGHS FAHPD Saddle paper guide home position sensor
<Inner finisher> FSRHS FSR3HPD Saddle roller home position sensor
FPDD FGED Delivery detector
FED Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1")
FSSHS FSSHPD Saddle staple home position sensor
FBED Tray paper detection
FSSES FSSD Saddle staple sensor
FULD Tray upper limit detection
FSSCS FSSDSW Saddle staple cover sensor
FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection
FSSSHS FSSTHPD Finisher saddle stapler shift home position
FLLD Tray lower limit detection
sensor
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1
FPMRS FPMCK Punch motor rotation sensor
FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2
FPD FPUC Punch unit detection (connector)
FRLD Roller up/down detection
FPCHPS FPHPD Punch home position sensor
FBRD Belt separation detection
FPDFS FPDD Punch dust sensor
FFJHPD Alignment HP detection front
FPHPS FPSHPD Punch unit home position sensor
FRJHPD Alignment HP detection rear
FPTS FPTD Punch timing sensor
FJPD Alignment guide position detection
FPES1 FPSD1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
FPES2 FPSD2 Punch paper edge sensor 2
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FPES3 FPSD3 Punch paper edge sensor 3
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FPES4 FPSD4 Punch paper edge sensor 4
FSD Staple empty detection
FPPS FPPD Punch paper position sensor
FSTD Staple lead edge position detection
FDSW Door open detection <4K finisher>
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
FPRPD Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1")
FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FPUC Punch unit connection detection
FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
FPHPD Punch HP detection
FED Entry port paper detection
FPSHPD Punch side resist HP detection
FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1
FAED2 Tray 1 area detection 2
FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2
FAED3 Tray 1 area detection 3
FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FPPD5 Punch paper surface detection 5
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FPPD6 Punch paper surface detection 6
FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection
FPDD Punch dust detection
FCCD Tray approach detection
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection
FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1
FPDD1 Discharged paper detection
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
<Saddle stitch finisher> FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection
PDPPD1 FJPID Paper pass paper transport detector 1 FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
PDPPD2 FJPOD Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
PDCS FJPDD Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FPPD1 FED Paper delivery detector 1 FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FPAPHS_F FFJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSD Staple empty detection
FPAPHS_R FRJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor R FSTD Needle lead edge position detection
FATPD FAD Paper alignment tray paper detector FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FGHPS FGHPD Gripper home position sensor FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 9
FSAD Staple safety SW <Saddle stitch finisher>
FSHTD Shutter open detection PDPGS FINRPS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FCD Upper door open detection PDPTM FJPM Paper pass paper transport motor
FFDD Front cover open detection PDCF FJFM Paper pass cooling fan
F24V 24V output interruption detection FPTM1 FFM Paper transport motor 1
FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection FDRLM FNM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection FGM FGM Gripper motor
FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection FPAM-F FFJM Paper alignment motor F
FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 FPAM-R FRJM Paper alignment motor R
FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2 FSSM FSM Stapler shift motor
FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FSM FFSM Staple motor
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection FPTM2 FLM Paper transport motor 2
FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection FSDM FFM2 Saddle motor
FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection FSPTM FTM Saddle paper transport motor
FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection FSPAM FSR3M Saddle paper alignment motor
FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FSPM FSJM Saddle positioning motor
FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection FSDSM FPPM Saddle staple motor
FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection FPHS1 FSSM Paper holding solenoid 1
FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection FPHS2 FPHS Paper holding solenoid 2
FPE Punch motor lock detection FTLM FPS Tray lift motor
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FPM FPNM Punch motor
FPHPD Punch HP detection FPSM FPSM Punch shift motor
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
FPFDD Punch front door open detection <4K finisher is installed>
FPDD Punch dust detection
FINRPS Interface paper gate solenoid
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
FJPM Interface transport motor
FJFM Interface transport fan motor
FFM Entry port transport motor
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( FAM Bundle paper exit motor
),16(1625&+(&.
3'33' 3'33' 3'&6 )33' FFJM Alignment motor front
)3$3+6B) )3$3+6B5 )$73' )*+36 FRJM Alignment motor rear
)'73' )3/' )33' )63+6
)673' )6056 )78/'
FSM Staple shift motor
)7//'
)7/056 )6+6 )66+36 )6(' FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
)6/6 )736 )&' )&'
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
)66: )&' )666: ))/
)'5+6 )33' )6$73' )666:
FFSM Staple motor
)3++' )6$3+6 )63*+6 )65+6 FSWM Oscillation motor
)3'' )66&6
)66+6 )66(6
FASM Rear edge assist motor
)666+6
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid
FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
3-3 FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
Purpose Operation test/check FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure ),1/2$'&+(&.
key.
㩷 )'5/0 )*0 )3$0) )3$05
The selected load performs the operation. 㩷 )6'0 )6370 )63$0 )630
<Inner finisher>
㩷
FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid
㩷
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid
(;(&87(
FPDS Paddle solenoid
FBRS Belt separation solenoid
FRM Registration motor
FSWM Oscillation motor
FAM Bundle exit paper exit motor
FFJM Alignment motor front
FRJM Alignment motor rear
FSM Staple shift motor
FFSM Staple motor
FTLM Tray lift motor
FFANM Fan motor
FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch side resist motor
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 10
Setting Default
3-10 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment M SADDLE_ADJU Saddle alignment position 35 - 65 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. ST_POS adjustment
N GRIPPER_POS Gripper exit position 35 - 65 50
Section Finisher
adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust-
panel. ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi-
tion adjustment"
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
folding position adjustment can be executed in the system
<Inner finisher> setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set-
ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system
ADJUST adjustment (front) setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 - 18 10 setting 5.0mm)
adjustment (rear) In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad-
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu-
adjustment lation, the above trouble will not occur.
(one position at the rear)
D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 <4K finisher>
FRONT adjustment Default
(one position in front) Item Display Item Set range
value
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 - 20 10
adjustment (center position adjustment (front)
of two positions binding) B STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 adjustment (one
adjustment (staple pitch of position at the rear)
two positions binding) C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 - 63 50 adjustment (one
CENTER sensor position in front)
H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 - 58 50 D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50
(paper transport direction) CENTER adjustment
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
<Saddle stitch finisher> adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 - 75 50 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
POSITION adjustment ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
%˖ ˖)2/',1*326,7,21
POSITION adjustment
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)5217$'-867
C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 '˖ ˖5($5$'-867
ADJUST adjustment (Front) (˖ ˖67$3/(5($5
*˖ ˖67$3/()5217
adjustment (Rear)
+˖ ˖67$3/()52175
E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 - 75 50 ,˖ ˖67$3/(%27+
adjustment (one position at -˖ ˖67$3/(3,7&+
the rear) (When the paper .˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
232mm) 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 11
<Desk> <A4 LCC>
DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection LPFM LCC transport motor
DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection LLM LCC lift motor
DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection LTRC LCC transport clutch
DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
DCSS12 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2
㩷
DCSS13 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
DCSS14 Desk 1 rear edge detection 4 㩷
'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
'3)0 '/80 '38& '/80
DCSI2 Desk 2 installation detection
DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection '38& '75&
<A4 LCC>
LPFD LCC transport sensor 4-5
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
Purpose Operation test/check
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the paper
LCD LCC tray insertion detection transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit.
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor Operation/Procedure
L24VM LCC24V power monitor
[Check the ON operation]
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
Press the clutch button of the target of the ON operation check.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
highlighted.
7(67
'6./&&6(1625&+(&.
'&6, '3)' '/8' '3('
[Check the OFF operation]
'&63' '&66 '&66 '&66 Press the highlighted button which is ON.
'&66 '&6, '3)' '/8'
'3(' '&63' '&66 '&66 When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
'&66 '&66 '6:B'6. returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
button Content
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC LCC transport clutch
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 12
5 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
&/26(
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
+/B80 +/B86
5-1 +/B8:
Display Content
OC COPY LAMP OC scanner lamp
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF scanner lamp (DSPF-installed model only)
[DSPF-installed model]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
2&&23</$03 '63)&23</$03
(;(&87(
[RSPF-installed model]
5-2
Purpose Operation test/check
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater 7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
lamp and the control circuit.
2&&23</$03
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
(;(&87(
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF operations 10
times at the interval of 500ms.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between
the frames.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 13
Load operation check method:
6 The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
6-1
Purpose Operation test/check Item/Display Content
POFM12 Paper exit cooling fan motor 12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
OZFM Ozone fan motor
the paper transport system (clutches and
PSFM Power cooling fan motor
solenoids) and the control circuits.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport RDCFM Suction fan motor
Operation/Procedure POFM3 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel MFP FAN (CPUFM) Controller fan motor
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
The selected load performs the operation. 7(67
)$1/2$'6(783
&/26(
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, 0)3)$1&38)0
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6-2 $*,1*7(676(77,1*
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan :$5083ǂ',6$%/( '9ǂ&+(&.ǂ',6$%/(
6+$',1*ǂ',6$%/( &&'ǂ*$,1ǂ)5((
and its control circuit.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(;(&87(
The selected load performs the operation.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 14
7-6 7-12
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
cycle. setting (for aging operation)
Section Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10- 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
key. (Setting range: 0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/66(77,1*
$˖ ˖25,*,1$/6
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( $˖
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783
˷̚˹
$˖ ˖&<&/(ǂ7,0(˄6(&˅
$˖
˷̚˹
2.
2.
8
7-8
Purpose Information display/print 8-1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Purpose Adjustment
Section Fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
Operation/Procedure the developing voltage in each print mode
Press [EXECUTE] key. and the control circuit.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for Section Toner supply, developing
warm-up is displayed Operation/Procedure
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. 1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
6(&21'6
saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A DVB_K K developing bias set value 0-700 496
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;(&87( '96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖'9%B.
$˖
˷̚˹
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 15
8-2 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Purpose Adjustment range value
A GB_K K charging/grid bias set value 0 - 850 650
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
8-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Transfer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:63;
$˖ %˖ ˖7&3/$,1%:'3;
)˖ ˖7&(19(/23(%:
*˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*
+˖ ˖7&&/($1,1*352&21
,˖ ˖7&$'62537,21
(;(&87( 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 16
8-17 9-3
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the separation bias voltage and the control the paper reverse section (duplex section)
circuit. and its control circuit.
Section Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
set value is output for 30 sec. tion is terminated.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
tion is terminated.
ADUM_U ADU motor upper
Setting Default ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Item/Display Content
range value
A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
(Front surface) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖3/9)$&(
$˖ %˖ ˖3/9%$&.
˷̚˹
(;(&87(
10
(;(&87( 2.
10-1
Purpose Operation test/check
9 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the
9-2 related circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check Section Toner supply, developing
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the sensors Operation/Procedure
and detectors in the switchback section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(duplex section) and the control circuit. The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
Operation/Procedure tion is terminated.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
played. toner cartridges.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
are highlighted. installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in over toner.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
APPD1 ADU transport detection 1
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2
tridge installed, the over toner state may be canceled by
making several background copies.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'86(1625&+(&. 721(5&/87&+$&7,9$7,21
'6:B$'8 $33' $33'
7'6& 710B& 710B0 710B<
(;(&87(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 17
13 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
&/26(
/&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
13--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
16
16--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section
$5(<28685("
Operation/Procedure
<(6 12 (;(&87(
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
14 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
&/26(
14--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5"
trouble.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
17
17--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
15 3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
15--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trou-
ble.
Section LCC
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 18
Display
21 Target
Display Content
Default range/
counter value No. of
digits
21-1 Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
Purpose Setting filing document filing
print counter
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
Section other counter
Operation/Procedure Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 Max. 8
counter ALL counter (Total)
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
Fuser unit FUSER WEB Fuser web 0 0-
panel.
SEND cleaning send 65535
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. counter
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) FUSER WEB Fuser web print 0 Max. 8
UNIT counter
Default FUSER WEB Use day of fuser 0 0 - 740
Item/Display Content Setting range
value DAY web unit
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 150K*1/ Drum life DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K 200K*2 meter number of drum (%) (1%
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free rotations (K) unit)
Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
*1: 28 CPM model *2: 36/45/50 CPM model life meter number of (%) (1%
developer unit)
Default value rotations (K)
Item 28 CPM model 36/45/50 CPM model
Group A Group B Group A Group B
A 100 150 150 200 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2817(5',63/$<
727$/287%:
Group Destination 727$/%:
22-2
Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of total mis-
feed and the number of troubles.
2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
22 Item/Display Content
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter
22-1
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the print count value of
each section and the operation mode. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$<
Section 0$&+,1(-$0
Operation/Procedure
563)'63)-$0
7528%/(
Display
Target Default range/
Display Content
counter value No. of
digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
quantity (BW) quantity of black
and white
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use 0 Max. 8
quantity quantity of black
and white
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
copy counter
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 19
1 : '10/Jun/01
Item/Display Content
22-3
1 SPF DSPF/RSPF
Purpose Information display (MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position and FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
the number of mis-feed at the position. DESK Desk unit
Section LCC Side LCC
FINISHER Finisher
Operation/Procedure
PUNCH Punch unit
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one NIC NIC
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$< ESCP ESCP font ROM
33'B1&3)'B60)775$<
PDL PDL font ROM
33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1
/&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&&
ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section) (N model only)
32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6 ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section) (N model only)
)'230)7
1 PCI PCI (MX-M282N/M362N/M452N/M502N)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
61
,&80$,1 1,&
*5$3+,& :$7(50$5.
3&8 (6&3
6&8 3'/
22-4 63) $&5(0$,1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the trouble (self diag) his- '(6.121(
tory. /&&
),1,6+(5
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. [N model (MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N)]
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 61
7(67 &/26(
,&80$,1 (0$18$/
7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$<
())/ ,&8%227 :$7(50$5.
'(6.121(
/&&
),1,6+(5
381&+
1,&
32:(5&21
[U model]
22-5 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3&8
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December
are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
PCU PCU
SCU SCU
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 20
[DSPF-installed model]
22-6
Purpose Information print
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to print information on various set- 25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
6&$1
versions. 67$3/(5
Section 381&+(5
67$03
Operation/Procedure 6$''/(67$3/(5
&29(5
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing. +3B21
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.) 2&/$037,0(
Print list
Item/Display Print content
mode
A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version, counter data, etc. [RSPF-installed model]
2 —
3 Data related to the process control
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step 25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
6&$1 6$''/(9)2/'
67$3/(5 &29(5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 381&+(5 +3B21
'$7$35,1702'(
67$03 2&/$037,0(
$˖ ˖'$7$3$77(51
$˖
˷̚˹
22-9
Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the print quantity of each
paper feed section.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
(;(&87( 2.
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 21
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 22
Device Model name Content
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$&+,1(6<67(0
0$&+,1(0;08 381&+(50;31;$
63)67$1'$5' ),1,6+(50;)1;
22-13
67$03$568 )$;0;);; Purpose Information display
'(6.0;'(; )$;0;)/;
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use quantity of the pro-
/&&0;/&; )$;0(025<$500
cess section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge).
Section Process
22-11
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Information display The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use frequency of send/ displayed.
receive of FAX.
(Only when FAX is installed.) DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
(K)
Operation/Procedure DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K
are displayed. DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) (cm) (K)
FAX SEND FAX send counter DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
SEND TIME FAX send time TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$<
'580&75*.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( '5805$1*(.
)$;&2817(5',63/$<
'5807851.
)$;ǂ287387
'580'$<.ǂ
)$;ǂ6(1'
'(9(&75*.ǂ
)$;ǂ5(&(,9('
'(9(5$1*(.
6(1'ǂ,0$*(6
'(9(7851.
6(1'ǂ7,0(
'(9('$<.
5(&(,9('ǂ7,0(
22-19
Purpose Information display
22-12
Function (Purpose) Used to display various counter values
Purpose Information display related to scan - image send.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position of the
Section
DSPF/RSPF and the number of mis-feed at
the position. Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Section Automatic document feeder
Change the display with [] [] key.
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) counter (B/W scan job)
* For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "Paper JAM code list" in NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE. counter (Color scan job) (N model only)
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page
OUTPUT
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 23
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) $//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67 '2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23< $'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) $'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1' $'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1*
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) $'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021
$17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67 ,1%281'5287,1*/,67
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$<
1(76&125*B%:
1(76&125*B&/
,17(51(7)$;287387 23
,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
,17(51(7)$;6(1' 23-2
0$,/&2817(5
)73&2817(5 Purpose Information print
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
60%6(1'
86%&17
75,$/02'(B% & paper jam and mis-feed.
6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
22-90 The trouble history of paper jams and mis-feed is printed.
Purpose Information print
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'(
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Change the display with [] [] key.
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 24
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)((' 3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5
3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
75$< 75$< 75$< 75$<
/&& $'8
(;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24 24-3
Purpose Data clear/Reset
24-1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and
Purpose Data clear/Reset the scan (reading) unit counter.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou- Section
ble counter. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 3) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The target counter is cleared.
3) Press [YES] key. SPF DSPF/RSPF document feed counter
The target counter is cleared. SCAN Scan counter
STAPLER Staple counter
MACHINE Machine JAM counter PUNCHER Puncher counter
SPF DSPF/RSPF JAM counter STAMP Stamp counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
COVER Cover open/close counter
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
HP_ON HP detection count
-$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
0$&+,1( 63) 7528%/( OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time
(DSPF-installed model only)
[DSPF-installed model]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
24-2
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. [RSPF-installed model]
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The target counter is cleared. 25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter +3B21 2&/$037,0(
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 25
24-4 24-6
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
printer counters of the transfer unit and the Section
fusing unit.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 3) Press [YES] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The target counter is cleared.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5
0$,17(1$1&($// )86(5:(%6(1' )86(5:(% )86(5:(%'$<
24-7
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter.
Section Photoconductor
24-5 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Data clear/Reset 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter.
3) Press [YES] key.
Section Toner supply, developing
The target counter is cleared.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Drum cartridge print counter (K)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
3) Press [YES] key. Number of day that used drum (Day) K
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
. & 0 <
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 26
24-9 24-15
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
and the self print mode print counter. scan mode and the image send.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. The target counter is cleared.
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity
counter (COLOR scan job) (N model only)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5 INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
35,17%: 27+(5%:
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
(N model only)
24-10
Purpose Data clear/Reset ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 27
24-31 25-2
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode (Web Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
page) password. density when replacing developer. (Auto-
Section matic adjustment)
Operation/Procedure Section Toner supply, developing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The service mode password is initialized. The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
displayed.
set the password to "service" (default).
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( trol level.
6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this $7'(9(92B.
simulation.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
7&'B. & 0 <
. (;(&87(
7&9B.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 28
26-3
26
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
26-1
(Japan only)
Purpose Setting
Section Auditor
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit operation from
Operation/Procedure
the right side.
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Section Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure Default
Item/Display Content
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1). EC1 EC1 mode operation
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
Item/Display Content AUDITOR vendor is used.
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO (Only the copy mode can be
controlled.)
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode communicating
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( with the parallel I/F (for
5,*+775$<6(783 DocuLyzer) (Japan only)
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
˷̚˹
(*1)
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
P OTHER NOT USED
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in
document filing print
2.
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
performed in the duplex print
mode.
26-2 If the remaining money
expires during continuous
Purpose Setting
printing, the sheets in the
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper type and the weight machine are discharged
type. without being printed on the
back surfaces.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
OFF Continuous printing is not
Operation/Procedure performed in the duplex print
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel. mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
LCC 0 8.5 x 11 printing every surface in all
1 A4 the printing process.)
2 B5 If the remaining money
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
1 LBS
printing on the back surface.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,=(6(783
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
/&& ˖ h $ % COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
*/%66(7 ˖ *5$0 /%6 TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT
sensor.
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear
sensor.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the paper exit sensor
in the main unit, the right tray,
and the after process unit.
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF
CONTROL the image send mode.
OFF There is no restriction in the
image send mode.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 29
Default
Item/Display Content
value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
PRINTER MODE1 PRINTER CONTROL MODE $h&281783
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8',7256(783 '(67,1$7,216(783
%8,/7,1$8',725 ˖ 3 (& 86$ &$1$'$ ,1&+ -$3$1
2876,'($8',725 ˖ 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
$%B% (8523( 8. $86
327+(5 9(1'25(; 9(1'25(;08/7,
6B9(1'25 $%B$ &+,1$
'2&$'- ˖ 21 2))
3)$'- ˖ 21 2))
9(1'2502'( ˖ 02'( 02'( 02'(
&2817837,0,1* ˖ )86(5B,1 )86(5B287 (;,7B287
,06&21752/ ˖ 21 2))
35,17(5&21752/ ˖ 02'( 02'( 02'(
(;(&87(
26-5 26-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
17") print. scanner.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key 2) Press [OK] key.
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
The set value in step 1) is saved.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
Item/Display Content Default value
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 30
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783 &(0$5.&21752/6(77,1*
$˖ ˖75,$/02'(˄<(612˅
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ $˖
˷̚˹
˷̚˹
2.
2.
26-18
Purpose Setting 26-35
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner Purpose Setting
save mode operation. Function (Purpose) Used to set the trouble history display
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) mode.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. 0 Only once display.
1 Any time display.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
Item Display Content The set value in step 1) is saved.
value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited. 7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed. $˖ ˖21&($1<
$˖
˷̚˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(56$9(02'(6(783
$˖ ˖&23<<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5<(612
˷̚˹
2.
26-38
2.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop"
26-30
when the maintenance timing is reached or
Purpose Setting the consumable part life is over.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre- Section
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety Operation/Procedure
standards).
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section
2) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 1) is saved.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
0 Control allowed Item/Display Content
value
1 Control inhibited A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0
LIFE OVER 1 Print stop
2) Press [OK] key.
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0
The set value in step 1) is saved. (0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due 1: STOP) (Print Continue)
to the power frequency, etc. 1 Continue/Stop setting of print
when the fusing web is end
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) (Print Stop)
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 31
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
(1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1* &23<63(('02'(6(783
$˖ ˖0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723 3267&$5' ˖ /2: +,*+
$˖ %˖ ˖)86(5:(%(1'˖&217,18(˖6723
˷̚˹
2.
26-50
26-41
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation specifications
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
and functions.
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 AMS Disable 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
1 AMS Enable
Default
2) Press [OK] key. Item/Display Content
value
The set value in step 1) is saved. A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
<Default value of each destination>
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable) FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable) limited. to *2
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable) 1 Finisher special paper
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable) The number of paper exit is
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable) not limited.
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
1 Paper feed tray color display
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
OFF during paper feed
3$03+/(702'($066(77,1*
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ (*1) Default values for each destination of item A
˷̚˹
Destination Item A
USA 1
CANADA 1
INCH 1
JAPAN 1
AB_B 1
EUROPE 1
UK 0
2.
AUS 1
AB_A 1
CHINA 1
26-49
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
When the setting is changed, the paper feed interval in print or
copy in the postcard mode is changed and the job speed is
changed accordingly.
LOW: The paper feed interval is long. (Normal mode)
HIGH: The paper feed interval is short. (when a paper jam occurs,
the number of sheets of jam paper is greater than that in the LOW
mode.)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 32
(*2)
26-52
Target Target paper setting
Purpose Setting
paper 0 1
1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are is stopped (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
stitch discharged continuously. When, when the or not.
finisher however, different kinds of paper exit tray
Section
sheets are mixed and full, 500
discharged and less than 30 sheets, or Operation/Procedure
sheets of a kind are 94mm height 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
continuously discharged, the of paper exit is
operation is performed similarly detected. 0 Count up
to that of setting value "1". 1 No count up
Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are 2) Press [OK] key.
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When, The set value in step 1) is saved.
however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and Destination Default
discharged and less than 100
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are
CANADA 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the
operation is performed similarly INCH 0 (Counted)
to that of setting value "1". JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation AB_B 0 (Counted)
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are is stopped EUROPE 0 (Counted)
discharged continuously. When, when the U.K. 0 (Counted)
however, different kinds of paper exit tray AUS. 1 (Not counted)
sheets are mixed and full, 250 AB_A 0 (Counted)
discharged and less than 10 sheets, or CHINA 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are 33.5mm
continuously discharged, the height of
operation is performed similarly paper exit is
to that of setting value "1". detected. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
Label The operation is stopped when $˖ ˖<(612
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are $˖
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When, ˷̚˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
)81&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ ˖%:5(9(56(<(6
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6
˷̚˹
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)(('75$<&2/25<(6
2. 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 33
26-65 26-69
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the limit of the staple process. Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
Section toner near end.
Operation/Procedure Section
Use the touch key to set. Operation/Procedure
[Target paper size] 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
<LIMIT SHEETS> 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR 3) Press [OK] key.
<LIMIT SHEETS(L)> The set value in step 2 is saved.
(A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8K)
Setting Default
* When mixed sizes of a same width are loaded, the setting con- Item/Display Content
range value
forms to the LIMIT SHEETS(L) setting. A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
PREPARATION message is
Set Setting Default (0: YES 1: NO) displayed.
Item Content
value range value 1 The toner preparation
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets of stapling: 30 or 50 50 message is not
SHEETS Max. 30 displayed.
50 Number of sheets of stapling: B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1
Max. 50 END message is
LIMIT ON Inner finisher: ON or ON (0: YES 1: NO) displayed.
COPIES 30 copies for all sizes OFF 1 The toner near end
1K saddle finisher: message is not
50 copies for all sizes displayed.
4K finisher: A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2
100 copies TONER END
Other than the above 2 Operation STOP in
50 copies TONER END
OFF Number of sets of stapling: Not 3 Operation STOP in
Limited TONER END
LIMIT 25 Number of sheets of stapling: 25 or 30 25 D TONER END Setting of the number of 1-5 3
SHEETS Max. 25 COUNT copy/print/FAX outputs
(L) 30 Number of sheets of stapling: Enable after TONER
Max. 30 NEAR END.
SADDLE ON Number of sets loaded in the ON or ON E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1
COPIES saddle staple: Limited (*1) OFF ALART status send of E-mail
OFF Number of sets loaded in the alert
saddle staple: Not Limited When the toner
preparation message
* LIMIT SHEETS: The 4K finisher is fixed to 50 sheets. is displayed (in near
* LIMIT SHEETS(L): Valid only for the 1K saddle finisher. near toner end)
The 4K finisher is fixed to 30 sheets. 1 Condition for Low
*1: 1-5sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets) / status send of E-mail
alert
10-15 sheets (10 sets)
When near toner end
<List of Default values and set values for each destination>
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7
/,0,76+((76 ˖
Set value
/,0,7&23,(6 ˖ Destination Toner preparation
21 2))
Toner near end message
/,0,76+((76˄/ ˖ message
6$''/(&23,(6 ˖ 21 2))
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 34
D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-
ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets) '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the $˖ %˖ ˖'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%. ˷̚˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1*
$˖ ˖26$75,$/02'(˄<(6˖12˅
$˖
˷̚˹
2.
26-73
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss (shade
removal amount) in the poster, the continu-
2.
ous enlargement copy, the card scan, and
the A3 wide copy mode.
Section 26-78
Operation/Procedure Purpose Setting
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. operation panel mode.
3) Press [OK] key. Section
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss Operation/Procedure
(shade delete quantity) is increased. 1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
range
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0 to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment 2) Press [SET] key.
(M) (shade delete amount:
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 35
27-2
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
27-1
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Purpose Setting ber. (FSS function)
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- Section
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Operation/Procedure [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
0 Not detection
1 Detection The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Press [OK] key. USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
The set value in step 1) is saved. SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
HOST may be continuously made every time when
',6$%/,1*2)87528%/( the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
$˖ ˖',6$%/(<(6
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
$˖ HOST.
˷̚˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783,1387
35(6(17˖
ǂǂ1(:˖ 6(7
86(5)$;B12 6(59$7(/B12
2.
3$86(
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send 0-3 0 1
in NE-B mode
NEB2 Send/Receive in 1
NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for send 2
in NE-F mode
NFB2 Send/Receive in 3
NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% timing setting (K) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 36
27-7
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
)66)81&7,216(783
$˖ ˖)66ǂ02'(1(%
$˖ %˖ ˖5(75<B%86<
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert call out.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7,0(50,187(B%86< (FSS function)
'˖ ˖5(75<B(5525
(˖ ˖7,0(50,187(B(5525
Section
)˖ ˖721(5ǂ25'(5ǂ7,0,1*. Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21
$˖ ˖)81&7,21<(612
$˖ %˖ ˖$/(57<(612
27-6
2.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
(FSS function)
27-9
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
0 Allow (Default)
gain adjustment retry number.
1 Inhibit
(FSS function)
Section
2) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 1) is saved.
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 3) Press [OK] key.
0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783
$˖ ˖<(612 The set value in step 2) is saved.
$˖
˷̚˹
A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(DSPF/RSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 0 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
RETRY adjustment retry number
2.
(11: Default)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 37
D JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value for
Display Item
occurrence of continuous jams
Occurrence date Retry Content
Alert judgment threshold value for Item name
(Display) number
occurrence of continuous jams
(Setting of the number of times of LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
continuous jams as the alert for LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry
continuous jams) (Default: 10 DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history
times) DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
* For DSPF1/
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper; DSPF2, only the
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. DSPF model is
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits displayed.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
retry is actually not registered. SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17 SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
$˖ ˖)(('7,0( SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
$˖ %˖ ˖)(('7,0(
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖*$,1$'-8670(175(75<
'˖ ˖-$0$/(57 DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits (Only the DSPF
model is displayed.)
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2.
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
'$7(5(75<
/68
/68
'(6.
27-10 '(6.
),1,6+(5
Operation/Procedure '63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
27-11 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
'$7((5525&2'(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 38
27-13
Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] key.
Code Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time passing
sensors time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
DSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
[N model] [U model]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
'$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0( 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( '$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 39
27-14
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33' 33' 32' 32'
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection 32' 7)' 7)' +326
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
30-2
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)667(6702'(6(783 Purpose Operation test/check
$˖ ˖&211(&7,217(6702'(212))
$˖ Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
˷̚˹ sors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
2. lighted.
* For setting the FSS function connection test mode, only DIS- CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection
ABLE to ENABLE can be made. (ENABLE to DISABLE cannot CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection
be made.) CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
30 CSS12
CSS13
Tray 1 rear edge detection 2
Tray 1 rear edge detection 3
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4
30-1 CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
Purpose Operation test/check CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
CPED2 Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection
sors and the detectors in other than the
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1
paper feed section and the control circuits.
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3
Operation/Procedure CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
played. MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
lighted.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
PPD1 Resist pre-detection
PPD2 Resist detection
POD1 Fusing rear detection ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection &3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection &66 &66 &66 &66
&3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection &66 &66 &66 &66
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection 03)' 03/' 0723 0723
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 40
33 40
33-1 40-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
reader sensor and the control circuit. adjustment.
Section Others Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
lighted.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
CARD Card Yes/No detection 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DATA Card number signal detection The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection 5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&. 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
&$5' '$7$ &/2&.
8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
33-2 0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&$5',''$7$&/($5
40-7
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default
Item/Display Content
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231
(A4)
C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 41
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1* '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
$˖ ˖0$;326,7,21
$˖ %˖ ˖3326,7,21
'˖ ˖0,1326,7,21
2. (;(&87(
41-3
41 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
41-1 ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check Section Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu- Operation/Procedure
ment size sensor and the control circuit. The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
Section Others sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Operation/Procedure The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Item/Display Content Detection level range
played.
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
lighted. PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
Close: Highlighted
PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
sensor status Document present: Highlighted
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3' 3'6(1625',63/$<
3' 3' 3' 3' 2&6:
3'>
@
3'>
@
3'> @
3'> @
3'>
@
3'>
@
3'> @
41-2
Purpose Operation test/check
43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
detection level.
43-1
Section Others
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to make the fusing reference temper-
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
ature setting 1 in each operation mode.
place a document on the document table.
Section Fusing
The sensor level without document is recognized.
Operation/Procedure
2) Set A3 (11” x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 42
Default value
Setting 28/36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
Item Display Content
range Group A Group B Group A Group B
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY TH_UM set value when ready standby 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
B HL_US READY TH_US set value when ready standby 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_UM set 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
value
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_US set 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
value
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation start 30 - 200 155 155 165 165 165 165 175 175
TH_UM set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 255 5
complete time
G WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 17
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 195
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 190 195
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 180
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 180
L HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195
M HL_US ENV PAPER Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 230 195
N HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 145 145 155 155 150 150 160 160
O HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 145 145 155 155 150 150 160 160
P PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set 30 - 200 165 165 185 185 175 175 195 195
value
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or below
R HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or below
S LO_WARMUP_TIME Q - R applying time 0 - 255 5
(Timer from completion of Ready)
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or above
U HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or above
V HI_WARMUP_TIME T - U applying time 0 - 255 5
(Timer from completion of Ready)
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'˖ ˖+/B863/$,13$3(5%:
,˖ ˖+/B86+($9<3$3(5
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch -˖ ˖+/B802+33$3(5
/˖ ˖+/B80(193$3(5
2.
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when 80 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 79g/m2 or 80 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system
setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 79g/m 2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 43
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each operation mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
3) Press [OK] key. trouble may be occur.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default value
Setting 28/36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
Item Display Content
range Group A Group B Group A Group B
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white plain paper 0 - 60 0
duplex applying number of
sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 70 - 230 190 195
duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 70 - 230 190 195
duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white heavy paper 0 - 60 0
duplex applying number of
sheets
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)˖ ˖+($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe
2.
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when 80 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 79g/m2 or 80 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system
setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 79g/m 2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed.
43-20
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
trouble may be occur.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 44
Setting Default value
Item Display Content
range Group A Group B
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation completion time under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80 80
H HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
I HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
J HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
K HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
L HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
M HL_US ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
N HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
O HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
P PRE-JOB LL Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
R HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
S LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for Q - R applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL 1 - 99 50 50
environment
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
U HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
V HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for T - U applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL 1 - 99 50 50
environment
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)˖ ˖:$5083)802))7ǂ//
+˖ ˖+/B80+($9<//
Group A Japan China AB_B ,˖ ˖+/B86+($9<//
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch -˖ ˖+/B802+3//
/˖ ˖+/B80(19(/23(//
2.
43-21
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
trouble may be occur.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 45
Setting Default value
Item Display Content
range Group A Group B
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
B HL_US READY HH Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
C HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation completion time under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
G WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
H HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
I HL_US HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
J HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
K HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
L HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
M HL_US ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
N HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
O HL_US E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
P PRE-JOB HH Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
R HL_US WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
S LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for Q - R applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
U HL_US WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
V HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for T - U applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub $˖ ˖+/B805($'<++
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B865($'<++
)˖ ˖:$5083)802))7++
+˖ ˖+/B80+($9<++
Group A Japan China AB_B ,˖ ˖+/B86+($9<++
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch -˖ ˖+/B802+3++
/˖ ˖+/B80(19(/23(++
2.
43-22
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
trouble may be occur.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 46
Setting Default value
Item Display Content
range Group A Group B
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under LL environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under LL environment
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub $˖ ˖+/B803/$,1%:'83//
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $˖ %˖ ˖+/B863/$,1%:'83//
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
2.
43-23
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
trouble may be occur.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 47
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$˖ ˖+/B803/$,1%:'83++
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B863/$,1%:'83++
)˖ ˖+($9<%:'83$33&17++
2.
43-24
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
trouble may be occur.
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under NN 1 - 99 55
environment, common to items HL_UM and HL_US.) (when duplex)
B LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under LL 1 - 99 50
environment, common to items HL_UM and HL_US.) (when duplex)
C HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under HH 1 - 99 50
environment, common to items HL_UM and HL_US.) (when duplex)
D NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under NN environment 1 - 60 5
E LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under LL environment 1 - 60 10
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under HH environment 1 - 60 5
G COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (heavy paper mode) 1 - 60 1
H COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP mode) 1 - 60 30
I COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Cool down time (envelope mode) 1 - 60 40
J FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval 1 - 20 8
)˖ ˖++BB)86B'83B&17
*˖ ˖&22/B'2:1B+($9<
+˖ ˖&22/B'2:1B2+3
,˖ ˖&22/B'2:1B'(9(/23
-˖ ˖)8602725
2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 48
Setting Default
43-31 Item Display Item
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C JOB END Number of forcible 1-5 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing COMP ACT operations of the fusing
web cleaning motor. CNT web motor when job end
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an ǂ
* The fusing web unit is used by installing to the fusing unit. For 44-1
checking the fusing web cleaning motor rotation, remove the Purpose Setting
whole fusing unit and check with the door open. Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Section Process
)86(5:(%&/($1,1*&+(&.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
(;(&87(
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
43-32 range value
HV Enable/Disable setting of Normal Enable
Purpose Adjustment/Setup the high density process (Disable:
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the control in normal 0: NO)
forcible operation of web cleaning when job operation Reverse
end. HT Enable/Disable setting of (Enable: Enable
the medium density 1: YES)
Section Fusing process control in normal
Operation/Procedure operation
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. TC Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the transfer output
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
correction
3) Press [OK] key. MD VG Enable/Disable setting of Enable
The set value in step 2 is saved. the membrane decrease
grid voltage correction
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of Enable
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- the membrane decrease
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a laser power voltage
trouble may be occur. correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
Setting Default the membrane decrease
Item Display Item
range value environment grid voltage
A JOB END Fusing web Enable 0-1 0 1 correction
COMP ACT motor forcible Disable 1 TN_HUM Enable/Disable setting of Enable
CHECK operation the toner density
condition when humidity correction
job end TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of Disable
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity 1 - 200 110 the toner density area
COMP ACT of compulsory action of the correction
INTERVAL fusing web motor at job end
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 49
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of Normal Disable
A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor 1 - 255 21
the toner density life (Disable:
sensitivity (light quantity)
correction 0: NO)
adjustment value
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of Reverse Enable
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor 0 - 255 0
the toner density print (Enable:
dark voltage
ratio correction 1: YES)
C PCS_K GRND Belt surface detection 0 - 255 0
TN_PROCON Enable/Disable setting of Enable
level when the
the toner density process
adjustment of item A is
control correction
completed
TN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of Disable
D PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the toner density
MAX detection level Max.
environment correction
value
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of Enable
E PCS_K DRUM MIN OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the toner density
detection level Min. value
correction unconditional
F PCS_K DRUM DIF OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
supply
detection level differential
TN_SPEND Enable/Disable setting of Disable
(Item D - Item E)
toner compulsory
consumption mode
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of Enable Error name Error content
the half-tone process Sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
control printer correction abnormality The adjustment target level is not reached by
feedback three times of retry operations.
TN_INTERMITTENT Enable/Disable setting of Enable Surface scanning PCS_K GRND error
the intermittent supply abnormality The difference between the max. value and
TN_ABSOLUTE Enable/Disable setting of Enable the min. value of the OPC drum surface
the unconditional supply detection level is out of the specified range in
TN_PROFIT_RETURN Enable/Disable setting of Enable detection of one circle of the OPC drum
the differential return surface.
correction
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the environment laser ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
02'(6(77,1*
+9 +7 7& 0'ǂ9*
(;(&87(
0'/' 0'(9 71B+80 71B$5($
(;(&87(
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
44-2 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment 3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
density sensor. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Section Process ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- Setting Default
Item/Display Content
matically. range value
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- A PCS_K TARGET Image density sensor 1 - 255 210
sensitivity adjustment
played.
target value
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. B LED_K OUTPUT Initial current level black 1 - 255 21
sensor LED light emitting
quantity set value in the
image density sensor
adjustment
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 50
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 44-6
range value
C PCS ADJSTMENT Adjustment error 1 - 255 10 Purpose Operation test/check
LIMIT allowance level in the Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sensor sensitivity control forcibly.
adjustment
D DRUM GROUND The difference between 0 - 255 128
Section Process
DIF the max. value and the Operation/Procedure
min. value of the OPC Press [EXECUTE] key.
drum surface detection
level is in the allowable
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
range in detection of one In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
circle of the OPC drum (Refer to the table below.)
surface. In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
E BIAS_BK Developing bias 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF reference value in the Result display Content description
high density process
COMPLETE Normal complete
control
ERROR Abnormal end
F BIAS PATCH Patch-forming developing 1 - 255 45
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
INTERVAL bias voltage interval
(voltage difference) in the
high density process Details of error display Content description
control BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
G K_PAT TARGET Toner patch density target 1 - 255 50 error
ID value (black) in the high K_HV_ERR Density process control operation error
density process control TIMEOUT_ERR Density process control operation time-out
H HV BK_GROUND Error judgment criterion 1 - 255 29
LIMIT for the difference between
the max. level and the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
min. level of the OPC 7(67 &/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
drum surface detection 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783
$˖ ˖3&6B.7$5*(7
$˖ %˖ ˖/('B.287387
)˖ ˖%,$63$7&+,17(59$/
*˖ ˖.B3$77$5*(7,'
2.
44-9
Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/ P BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
PRN (PROCON) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
N BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Actual operation mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer voltage correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer voltage correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer voltage correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer voltage correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 51
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER DRUM MD K STEP OPC drum membrane decrease correction STEP number display 0-4 0
(K)
MD K DRUM COUNTER OPC drum membrane decrease correction counter (rotation 0 - 20 0
distance)
VG MD K REVISE(VG) Display of MC correction voltage for OPC drum membrane 0 - 255 0
decrease
LD MD K REVISE(LD) OPC drum membrane decrease laser power correction display 0 - 255 0
LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) Display of drum membrane decrease environment laser power -128 - 128 0
correction
LD HV MD K REVISE(LD HV) Display of high-density process control laser power correction -128 - 128 0
LD ALL MD K REVISE(LD ALL) Display of laser power total correction amount -128 - 128 0
HV MD K REVISE(HV) OPC drum membrane environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
CP MD K REVISE(CP) OPC drum membrane / Environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination data stored in the PCU PWB of the machine
MODEL TYPE Model type of the machine 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K Crum destination data
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control execution number 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Half-tone process control execution umber 0 - 99999999 0
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/
%/$&.B3*%B'9B
%/$&.B1*%B'9B
44-12
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Information display
7(67
3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$<
$'.B6/.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the $'.B,17.
high density process control and the image 7$5*(7.
density sensor.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
Display Default
Item/Display Content
range value
7$5*(7 3$7&+ 3$7&+
ADK_SL (K) Development characteristics -9.99 - 0
gradient coefficient (High density 9.99
process control operation)
ADK_INT(K) Development characteristics -999.9 - 0 44-14
intercept level (High density process 999.9 Purpose Information display
control operation 0V)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
TARGET (K) High density process control target 0.00 - 0
perature and humidity sensor.
density level (K) 255.00
n-1 High density process control nth 0 - 255 0 Section
time patch density level 1 (n=1-5) Operation/Procedure
n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
n-3 Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
n-4 Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
• BK only Item/Display Content Display range
n-1 Patch data nth time patch 1 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor Temperature:
n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 main A/D value, 0 - 255C (1C)
n-3 Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
n-4 Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 TH_US Fusing upper thermistor Temperature:
• BK only sub A/D value, 0 - 255C (1C)
temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
TEMPRATURE Temperature thermistor Temperature:
A/D value, temperature -40.0 - 60.0C (0.1C)
(for process control) AD value: 0 - 1023
HUMIDITY Humidity sensor A/D Humidity:
value, humidity (for 5.0 - 90.0% (0.1%)
process control) AD value: 0 - 1023
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 52
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
range value
7(67
6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725 AREA VO Toner density sensor control -127 - 0
7+B80GHJ;;;
voltage correction value for the 127
7+B86GHJ;;;
7(035$785(GHJ;;;
temperature and the humidity
+80,',7<;;; HUD VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for a
change in the temperature and
the humidity
PRINT RATE VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for the
document print ratio
PROCON VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for the
high density process control
result
44-16 LIFE VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for the
Purpose Information display developer life
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control SENSITIVITY VO Toner density sensor sensitivity 1 - 999 500
data. correction control voltage
correction value
Section Toner supply, developing
ENV VO Toner density sensor control -127 - 0
Operation/Procedure voltage correction value for the 127
1) The toner density control data are displayed. environment with a high humidity
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 53
Category Item/Display Content
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Coefficient [LOW FIELD] Coefficient value of the
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
approximate equation in the
low density area
[MID FIELD] Coefficient value of the
approximate equation in the
medium density area
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process control
value reference value
Correction [S_VALUE] Half tone process control
value correction value
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone process
(;(&87(
control correction value
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process
DITHER_VALUE] control reference dither value
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density
44-22
HT_VALUE] adjustment correction value
Purpose Information display Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous half tone process
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density correction value control value
level in the half tone process control opera-
tion.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Section Process +$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$<
Operation/Procedure
>/2:),(/'@$%&
>0,'),(/'@$%&
1) The toner patch density level made in the half tone process
control operation is displayed.
Item/Display Content
BASE_n Belt substrate data (n = 1 - 6)
ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 6)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 1(;7
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
37. 37.
%$6( ,'
%$6( 44-25
%$6(
%$6(
Purpose Setting
%$6(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
%$6(
,'
correction value for the half tone process
,' control.
,'
,'
Section Process
,' Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
3) Press [OK] key.
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
,' individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
,' ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
,' trouble may be occur.
,'
Setting Default
,' Item/Display Content
range value
,'
A HIGHTLIGHT Correction point in the 1 - 17 7
POINT low density area
%$&.
B MID FIELD POINT Correction point in the 1 - 17 12
medium density area
C LOW FIELD Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
DITHER DEF the low density area
44-24 D MID FIELD DITHER Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
Purpose Information display DEF the medium density area
E LOW POINT COEF Correction amount low 0 - 100 100
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
density point correction
the correction level in the half tone process
coefficient
control operation.
F MID POINT COEF Correction amount 0 - 100 100
Section Process medium density point
Operation/Procedure correction coefficient
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 54
44-27
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Data clear/Reset
7(67
+$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<
$˖ ˖+,*+7/,*+732,17
$˖ %˖ ˖0,'),(/'32,17
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/2:),(/'',7+(5'() tone process control.
'˖ ˖0,'),(/'',7+(5'()
(˖ ˖/2:32,17&2()
Section Process
)˖ ˖0,'32,17&2() Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The correction data of the half tone process control are
cleared.
2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
44-26
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
trol compulsory.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
are displayed.
44-28
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Purpose Setting
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(;(&87( NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
clearing shut-off.) BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can BK process control Enable 2
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item I.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
ON the power and after passing TIME. BK process control Enable 2
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 55
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
Enable/Disable the machine are monitored only during a BK process control Enable 2
setting job for every 2hours (set by item L).
When the changes in the temperature
and the humidity are greater than the
specified level (the set value of item L) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated rotation time of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the OPC drum unit reaches a certain Inhibit 1
level after supply the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated rotation time of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the BK position OPC drum unit reaches Inhibit 1
a certain level after execution of the
previous density correction.
H REFRESH YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation display YES 0-1 0 1
MODE NO manual process control key by key Key operation display NO 1
operations
Process control I DAY When the next warm-up if there is no job 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
conditions after a job after passing the specified days judgment
setting days from execution of the previous 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 1 - 999
process control passing
J PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
K INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME" (h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
L HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (h: hour)
M HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the execution of 1-9 2
the previous process control of "HUM”
N BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK position 1 - 999 30
OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
O HT_DIF Bias variation difference value used for HT process control execution 1-255 60
judgment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖,1,7,$/<(6
$˖ %˖ ˖6:21
'˖ ˖+80B/,0,7
(˖ ˖+80
)˖ ˖5(9<(6
*˖ ˖5(9B%.<(6
+˖ ˖5()5(6+02'(
,˖ ˖'$<
-˖ ˖3,;B5$7,2B%.
.˖ ˖,17(59$/7,0(
/˖ ˖+80+285
2.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. +$/)721(6(77,1*
%˖ ˖35,17(5+9ė3+7
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 56
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
44-37
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Purpose Setting mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
tion level in the continuous printing opera- adjustment value.
tion. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
Section Toner supply, developing increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
Operation/Procedure sity is decreased.
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
2) Select a target item with [] [] buttons. range value
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
NOTE:
HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
tion, this simulation is used.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
Item/ Default Variable
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Display value range
Current DV less than 300[v] A 0 0-5 E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Bias voltage (*1) Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
300[v] or more, less B 0
than 450[v] F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
450[v] or more C 0 HIGH 1 - 99 50
Time (T) from Less than 10 [sec] & D 0 0-12 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
termination of after process control (*2) HIGH 1 - 99 50
continuous JOB H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
outputs to start 10 [sec] or more, less E 0 HIGH 1 - 99 50
of the next than 60 [sec]
output 60 [sec] or more, less F 0
operation
than 240 [sec] ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
240 [sec] or more G 0 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$˖ ˖$872
$˖
<Use example> %˖ ˖$872
(*1) The default of A/B/C is "0" and this function is set to OFF. '˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
When 10 sheets are printed in the multi copy and the 10th output is
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
lighter than the first sheet, set the values of 1 - 5. *˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
The greater the value is, the darker the density of the 10th sheet or +˖ ˖0$3
later.
(*2) The correction amount is adjusted by the length of the leaving time.
When (*1) is 1 - 5, the greater the value of (*2) is, the greater the
density of printing is.
/2: +,*+ 2.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*
$˖ ˖'9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
46-4
$˖ %˖ ˖'9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
Purpose Adjustment
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖'9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
'˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
(˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B send mode (color mode). (N model only)
)˖ ˖'9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 57
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@ area and the high density area.
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 target color is increased, and vice versa.
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
(˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272
Default
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ Item/Display Content
value
*˖ ˖0$3
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
2. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'(
$˖ ˖/2:ǂ'(16,7<ǂ32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖+,*+ǂ'(16,7<ǂ32,17
˷̚˹
46-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode (monochrome mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch % * 5 2.
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
46-9
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image
density (copy, image send mode)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [DSPF] keys
Item/Display Content
range value
on the touch panel. (DSPF-installed model only)
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 1 - 99 50
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
panel.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@ increased, and vice versa.
$˖ ˖$8727(;7
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7 [DSPF-installed model]
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
Setting Default
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
Item Button Display Content
(˖ ˖35,17('3+272 range value
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
*˖ ˖0$3
SIDEA: LOW exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: LOW mode exposure
2. adjustment
(Low density side)
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure
46-8 adjustment
Purpose Adjustment (Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color SIDEA: HIGH exposure
balance RGB. (N model only) adjustment
Section (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
Operation/Procedure
SIDEA: HIGH mode exposure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch adjustment
panel. (High density side)
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
panel. HIGH exposure
adjustment
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(High density)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 58
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
range value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
SIDEB: LOW exposure
adjustment $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖
(Low density side) %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
F FAX: HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 7(;73+272 35,17('3+272 3+272 0$3
adjustment
(High density)
(;(&87(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 59
Item/Display Content Set value Default value
46-16
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Purpose Adjustment Stop (for scanner) STOP
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density manually. AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
Section
SHARP
Operation/Procedure
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each $(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. $(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is $(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
46-23
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
Purpose Setting
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17 Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
(˖ ˖32,17
high density section (High density tone gap
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
supported).
+˖ ˖32,17 Section
,˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
0 Enable
1 Inhibit
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 60
46-32
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Adjustment
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖
$˖ ˖(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the
˷̚˹ document background density in the auto-
matic copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
46-24 adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
Purpose Adjustment and the low density image is decreased.
Function (Purpose) Copy and printer density adjustment [DSPF-installed model]
(Auto adjustment)
Setting Default
Section Item Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (SIDE2) back surface)
The automatic adjustment of copy and printer density is exe- D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
cuted, and then the adjustment result pattern of the copy mode E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
as well as that of the printer mode is printed. (SIDE1) front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
3) Press [OK] key.
(SIDE2) back surface)
The half tone correction target registration is processed. G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
4) The half-tone correction execution menu is displayed. Press H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
[EXECUTE] key. (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
Half-tone correction is executed. When [RESULT] button is I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
pressed after completion of correction, the data of the half-tone (SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
correction can be checked.
Display Content ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)˖ ˖6&$1˖'63)˄6,'(
*˖ ˖)$;˖2&
+˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ,˖ ˖)$;˖'63)˄6,'(
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 2.
[RSPF-installed model]
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: RSPF Copy mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
(;(&87( C SCAN: OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX: OC FAX mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
F FAX: RSPF FAX mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
7(67
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
2.
(;(&87(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 61
1 : '10/Jun/01
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from '˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
(˖ ˖h>'3,@21
the formula below. )˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
+˖ ˖h>'3,@2))
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial ,˖ ˖h>'3,@21
values (default).
When the adjustment values of items A and B are decreased, the
copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment 2.
Default value
MX- MX-
Setting M283/ M282/
Item/Display Content
range M363/ M362/
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
M453/ M452/
M503 M502
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX 1 - 99 50 45
LEVEL(ALL) send image density.
46-39 (Collective adjustment
Purpose Adjustment of all the modes)
(;(&87( 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 62
46-41 Default
Setting
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display Content value
range
*1 *2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 45
(Normal) B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 45
Section C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 45
Operation/Procedure D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 45
1) Set the original on the original table. E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 45
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 45
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 45
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set H EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 45
and the scanned document image is outputted. H_TONE Half tone
I EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 45
Default H_TONE Half tone
Setting
Item/Display Content value J EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 45
range
*1 *2 H_TONE Half tone
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 45 K EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 45
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 45 H_TONE Half tone
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 45 L EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 45
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 45 H_TONE Half tone
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 45 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 45
Exposure 1
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
MODE mode Exposure 1 (AUTO) EXP2 Fine/ 3
EXP1 2
Exposure 2
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
EXP3 Fine/ 4
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
Exposure 3
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP4 Fine/ 5
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 Exposure 4
EXP5 Fine/ 6
*1: MX-M283/M363/M453/M503
Exposure 5
*2: MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 AUTO Fine/ 7
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- H_TONE Automatic/
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F, halftone
and press [EXECUTE] key. EXP1 Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1
/Half tone
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( EXP2 Fine/ 9
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/
H_TONE Exposure 2
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ % ˖ ˖(;32685(
/Half tone
˷̚˹ & ˖ ˖(;32685( EXP3 Fine/ 10
' ˖ ˖(;32685( H_TONE Exposure 3
(˖ ˖(;32685( /Half tone
)˖ ˖(;32685(
* ˖ ˖(;(&87(02'($872
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
(;(&87( 2.
*1: MX-M283/M363/M453/M503
*2: MX-M282/M362/M452/M502
46-42 To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
Purpose Adjustment ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. and press [EXECUTE] key.
(Fine)
Section ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;),1(
$˖ ˖$872
$˖
1) Set the original on the original table. % ˖ ˖(;32685(
)˖ ˖(;32685(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set * ˖ ˖$872+B721(
,˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
-˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
.˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
/˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
(;(&87( 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 63
46-43
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Adjustment 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1(
$˖ ˖$872
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. $˖ % ˖ ˖(;32685(
(Super Fine) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
* ˖ ˖$872+B721(
1) Set the original on the original table.
+˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set /˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
Default
Setting
Item/Display Content value
range 46-44
*1 *2
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 45 Purpose Adjustment
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 45 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 45 (Ultra fine)
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 45 Section
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 45
Operation/Procedure
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 45
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50 45 1) Set the original on the original table.
/Auto/Half tone 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 45 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
H_TONE /Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 45
H_TONE /Half tone
and the scanned document image is outputted.
J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 45
Default
H_TONE /Half tone Setting
Item/Display Content value
K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 45 range
*1 *2
H_TONE /Half tone
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 45
L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 45
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
H_TONE /Half tone
1
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine 1- 1 1
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
MODE mode /Auto 12 (AUTO)
2
EXP1 Super Fine 2
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
/Exposure 1
3
EXP2 Super Fine 3
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
/Exposure 2
4
EXP3 Super Fine 4
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
/Exposure 3
5
EXP4 Super Fine 5
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50 45
/Exposure 4
tone
EXP5 Super Fine 6
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
/Exposure 5
1/Half tone
AUTO Super Fine 7
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
H_TONE /Auto
2/Half tone
/Half tone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
EXP1 Super Fine 8
3/Half tone
H_TONE /Exposure 1
/Half tone K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
4/Half tone
EXP2 Super Fine 9
H_TONE /Exposure 2 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50 45
/Half tone 5/Half tone
EXP3 Super Fine 10
H_TONE /Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 Super Fine 11
H_TONE /Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 Super Fine 12
H_TONE /Exposure 5
/Half tone
*1: MX-M283/M363/M453/M503
*2: MX-M282/M362/M452/M502
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 64
Default
Setting Default
Item/Display Content value Setting
range Item/Display Content value
*1 *2 range
*1 *2
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 45
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 45
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 45
Exposure 1
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 45
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
Exposure 2 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 45
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 45
Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50 45
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5 /Half tone 1
Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 45
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6 /Half tone
Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 45
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 /Half tone
H_TONE Auto/Half J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 45
tone /Half tone
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 45
H_TONE Exposure /Half tone
1/Half tone L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 45
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9 /Half tone
H_TONE Exposure 2 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1
/Half tone MODE EXP1 mode 600dpi/ 12 2 (AUTO)
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10 Exposure 1
H_TONE Exposure 3 EXP2 600dpi/ 3
/Half tone Exposure 2
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11 EXP3 600dpi/ 4
H_TONE Exposure 4 Exposure 3
/Half tone EXP4 600dpi/ 5
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12 Exposure 4
H_TONE Exposure 5 EXP5 600dpi/ 6
/Half tone Exposure 5
AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7
*1: MX-M283/M363/M453/M503
H_TONE Half tone
*2: MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 EXP1 600dpi/ 8
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- H_TONE Exposure 1
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, /Half tone
and press [EXECUTE] key. EXP2 600dpi/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( EXP3 600dpi/ 10
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1( H_TONE Exposure 3
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ /Half tone
㪙˖ ˖(;32685(
(600dpi). $˖
$˖ ˖$872
% ˖ ˖(;32685(
'˖ ˖(;32685(
Operation/Procedure (˖ ˖(;32685(
* ˖ ˖$872+B721(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. +˖ ˖(;32685(+B721(
(;(&87( 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 65
Operation Setting Default
46-47 Item/Display Content
mode range value
Purpose Setting PUSH SCAN D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy (GRAY) (G) 1 com- (MIDDLE
and scan images (JPEG). (Scanner (*1) pression 1)
(Monochrome mode 1
Section half-tone Low
Operation/Procedure mode)) com-
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. pression
MIDDLE Medium 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2 com-
3) Press [OK] key. pression
The set value is saved. mode 2
Medium
[N model] com-
pression
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content MIDDLE Medium 2
mode range value
3 com-
(COLOR) A COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
pression
(Document (C) com-
mode 3
filing (COLOR pression
High
mode)) (Color)
com-
MIDDLE Medium 1
pression
com-
pression *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com-
(Color) pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
HIGH High 2
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
com-
pression in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how-
(Color) ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
LOWER Super 3 reduced.
low com-
pression
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
(Color) 7(67 &/26(
&23<䊶6&$1䊶0)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17
COPY B COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) $˖ ˖&23<&/2:
2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 66
1 : '10/Jun/01
Button Default
46-48 Item Content
display value
Purpose Setting TEXT PHOTO 600DPI Text photograph 1200DPI
1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the output resolution in each 1200DPI*
copy mode. PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI Printed photo 1200DPI
(MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N only) 1200DPI*
PHOTO 600DPI Photograph 1200DPI
Section
1200DPI*
Operation/Procedure
MAP 600DPI Map 600DPI
1) Select the output resolution of each copy mode with the key. 1200DPI*
In order to change the reproducibility of line images, change
this setting. * The 1200dpi mode is available only for the MX-M283N/M363N/
M453N/M503N.
600dpi mode: Line images becomes thicker. The reproducibility of
line images is increased.
1200dpi mode: Line images are reproduced finer than 600dpi ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)81&7,216(77,1*)25&23<287387
mode. $872 ˖ '3, '3,
7(;7 ˖ '3, '3,
Button Default 7(;7357 ˖ '3, '3,
Item Content
display value 7(;73+272 ˖ '3, '3,
35,17('3+272 ˖
AUTO 600DPI Automatic 600DPI '3, '3,
3+272 ˖ '3, '3,
1200DPI* 0$3 ˖ '3, '3,
TEXT 600DPI Text 600DPI
1200DPI*
TEXT PRT 600DPI Text printed photo 600DPI
1200DPI*
46-51
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
mode heavy paper mode and the image
process mode (manual adjustment).
Section Item/Display Content
Operation/Procedure HEAVY Heavy paper
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key 600ED Error diffusion
(600dpi)
[PAPER/DITHER].
1200ED Error diffusion
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the 1
(MX-M283N/M363N/ (1200dpi)
touch panel. M453N/M503N only)
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. DITH1 600dpi Dither For PRINTED PHOTO/
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. PHOTO MODE
DITH2 1200dpi For TEXT PRINTED PHOTO /
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
(MX-M283N/M363N/ dither TEXT PHOTO /
putted. M453N/M503N only) PRINTED PHOTO MODE
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no 1
DITH3 1200dpi For PHOTO MODE
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. (MX-M283N/M363N/ dither
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is M453N/M503N only)
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density.
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range HEAVY 600ED 1200ED DITH1 DITH2 DITH3
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 500 507 500 517 514
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 501 526 499 523 525
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 501 537 499 525 527
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 502 564 498 533 531
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 503 579 498 540 532
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 508 594 498 549 529
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 513 579 508 526 506
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 489 522 519 481 473
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 465 451 532 459 491
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 451 398 528 483 522
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 437 357 546 492 555
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 416 325 567 474 543
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 410 306 558 449 511
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 408 303 536 425 477
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 67
46-61
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment
7(67
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni-
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 tion level in the image send mode (color,
'˖ ˖32,17 gray, auto exposure mode). (N model only)
(˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
-˖ ˖32,17 panel.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3$3(5',7+(5 (;(&87( 2. 3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
46-52 ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
Purpose Data clear/Reset trouble may be occur.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini-
mode heavy paper and the image process tial value, an image quality trouble may occur.
mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
Setting Default
to the default values.) Item/Display Content
range value
Section A SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Operation/Procedure SWITCH [TXT ON Text on dot
SCR]
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
B SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL]. SWITCH [LINE SCR] line screen
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. C SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
3) Press [YES] key. SWITCH [SMALL Dot in a small area
SCR]
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. D SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [BK TXT 1] adjustment:
Item/Display Content Black text 1
HEAVY Heavy paper E SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
600ED Error diffusion ADJUST [CL TXT 1] adjustment:
(600dpi) Color text 1
1200ED Error diffusion F SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
(MX-M283N/M363N/ (1200dpi) ADJUST [BK TXT 2, adjustment:
M453N/M503N only) CL TXT 2] Black text 2, Color
DITH1 600dpi Dither For PRINTED PHOTO/ text 2
PHOTO MODE G SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
DITH2 1200dpi For TEXT PRINTED PHOTO / ADJUST [BK/CL] adjustment:
(MX-M283N/M363N/ dither TEXT PHOTO / Chroma/Achroma
M453N/M503N only) PRINTED PHOTO MODE judgment
DITH3 1200dpi For PHOTO MODE H SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
(MX-M283N/M363N/ dither ADJUST [TXT ON adjustment:
M453N/M503N only) BG] Text on background
I SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [SCR] adjustment:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Dot
&23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5
+($9<3$3(5 (' (' ',7+
',7+
',7+
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@
$˖ %˖ ˖6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@
'˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@
(˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@
)˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@
*˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@
+˖ ˖6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@
2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 68
46-63
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment
7(67
+$/)721(6(/(&7',7+(5('
$˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den- $˖ %˖ ˖35,17('3+272
sity area of a scan image. (N model only) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
Section (˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+27276
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
2.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
46-90
and the low density image is decreased.
Purpose Adjustment
Setting Default Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
Item/Display Content
range value
compression PDF images. (N model only)
A COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) Section
B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (Color PUSH) 1-9 3 Operation/Procedure
C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5 1) Select a target adjustment mode with [TEXT], [COLOR] and
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH) [BG LAYER] keys.
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH)
2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key.
E COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text photograph 1-9 3 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PHOTO (Color PUSH) 4) Press [OK] key.
F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (Color PUSH) 1-9 5 The set value is saved.
G COLOR PUSH: AUTO Automatic 1-9 5
(Color PUSH) Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
range value
A TEXT GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( SENSITIVITY selection
%*5(029($'-8670(17
B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
$˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
FINDLINES selection
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25386+35,17('3+272 C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
'˖ ˖&2/25386+3+272*5$3+ FINDLINES SW SW (H)
(˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;73+272
D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
)˖ ˖&2/25386+0$3
*˖ ˖&2/25386+$872
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
INDEXING SEL number
adjustment SW
F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
2.
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
A COLOR LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
46-64 INTENT selection
C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
Purpose Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the image process mode in D R-RATIO Gray scale 0- 299
each copy mode. ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R) 1000
Section E G-RATIO Gray scale 0- 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) 1000
Operation/Procedure
A BG BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
1) Select a target mode of setting with [] [] key on the touch LAYER INTENT 1 setting
panel. B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. INTENT 2 priority setting
3) Press [OK] key.
0: Error diffusion process 1: Dither pattern process
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&203$&73')6(77,1*6
Setting Default
Item/Display Content $˖ ˖*/<3+6(16,7,9,7<
range value $˖ %˖ ˖%*6:)25),1'/,1(6
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 69
Setting Default
48 Item/Display Content
range value
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
48-1 adjustment (Main scan)
Purpose Adjustment F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
adjustment (Sub scan)
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction).
Section Scanner
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch $˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖
panel. %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
'˖ ˖63)68%
3) Press [OK] key. 2.
Scan speed
Reference speed
Unit
HI MID LO
OC 346.0mm/s 173.0mm/s 86.5mm/s
2.
RSPF 259.5mm/s 173.0mm/s –
DSPF 346.0mm/s 173.0mm/s –
adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
2.
adjustment (Sub scan)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 70
[RSPF-installed model]
49
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0272563(('$'-8670(17
49-1
$˖ ˖05+, Purpose Version upgrade
$˖ %˖ ˖050,'
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖05/2
'˖ ˖63)+,
Section
2. Operation/Procedure
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
48-6 operation panel section.)
Purpose Adjustment 3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each 4) Select a target firmware.
motor. Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
Section 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure 6) Press [YES] key.
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch The selected firmware is updated.
panel. When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-
3) Press [OK] key. played.
The set value is saved. Item/Display Content
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, CONFIG Configuration data
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN
Setting Default LANGUAGE Language support data program (General term)
Item/Display Content
range value
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
A RRM Resist motor correction value 1 - 99 47
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
B DVM_K Developing K motor correction 1 - 99 41
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section
(DM) value
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section
C FSM (FUM) Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 56
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section
D PFM Paper transport motor correction 1 - 99 50
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section
value
A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
E POM Paper exit motor correction value 1 - 99 51
A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section
F FUSER Fusing speed select timing 1 - 99 50
SETTING FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
G RRM RRM speed increasing start 0 - 255 0 FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section
START timing 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section
H RRM END RRM speed increasing end timing 0 - 255 38 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section
4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- 4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section
cially required. 1KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- 1KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image 4KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
quality trouble may occur. 4KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section (DSPF-installed model only)
9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖550 DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section (DSPF-installed model only)
$˖ %˖ ˖'90B.'0 FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)60)80
FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section
'˖ ˖3)0
(˖ ˖320 ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
)˖ ˖)86(56(77,1* PDL_FONT PDL font
*˖ ˖55067$57
ANIMATION Animation data
+˖ ˖550(1'
IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
WEB HELP WEB help
UNICODE UNICODE table
&2/25 0212 +($9<
ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section (N model only)
2.
ACREM (MAIN) ACRE Main section (N model only)
ACRE_DATA ACRE table (N model only)
Item/Display Content
CONF Configuration data
ICUM ICU Main section former half
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
LANG Language support data program (General term)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 71
Item/Display Content When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCUB PCU Boot section
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
PCUM PCU Main section (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
49-3 50
Purpose Install
Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the Operation 50-1
Manual data stored in the HDD. Purpose Adjustment
(N model only)
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
Section ment
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Operation/Procedure
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is panel.
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
default.
The current version and the update version are displayed.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
active from gray out.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
updated.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 72
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50 $˖ ˖55&$
edge edge reference $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
adjust- position (OC) ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50 *˖ ˖/($'
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50 +˖ ˖6,'(
.˖ ˖)52175($5
feed
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50 2.
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment 50-2
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30 Purpose Adjustment
adjust- area adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
the image loss (simple adjustment).
area adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20 Section
REAR void area Operation/Procedure
adjustment
1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.
L Off- OFFSET OC document off- 1 - 99 50
center _OC center adjustment 2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make
adjust- a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
ment 3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
M Magnifi- SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50 unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust-
cation _SPEED scanning ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
ratio _OC magnification ratio
adjustment values of L1 and L2.
correc- adjustment (CCD)
tion L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 scale.
scanning correction value L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 edge.
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value L1
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value Paper lead
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 edge
value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 66
value
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 73
Setting Default
Item/Display Description
range value ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/&
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 74
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 66
adjustment correction
value
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
selection
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
range value
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
$˖ ˖'(1&
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
amount amount setting
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
(˖ ˖'(1%&6 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
)˖ ˖'(1%&6 setting
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
(SIDE2) edge image loss
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
amount setting
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817 I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
document off-
(;(&87( 2. center adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface document
off-center
50-6
adjustment
Purpose Adjustment K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and front surface
the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode). magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
Section scan)
Operation/Procedure
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
is delayed.
panel.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
is increased.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
[DSPF-installed model] increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
Setting Default All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Item/Display Content
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
document scan /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
position $˖ ˖6,'(
$˖
adjustment (CCD) %˖ ˖6,'(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 75
[RSPF-installed model]
L4: Distance a (DSPF/RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit:
Setting Default 0.1mm)
Item/Display Content
range value L5: Distance a (DSPF/RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit:
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 0.1mm)
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss Distance "a"
amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting Setting Default
Item/Display Content
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 range value
document off- A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
center adjustment 0.1mm unit) from the front
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50 surface image lead edge
surface document to the scale of 10mm.
off-center B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
adjustment 0.1mm unit) from the back
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 surface image lead edge
front surface to the scale of 10mm.
magnification ratio C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
adjustment (Sub (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
scan) D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 (SIDE1) loss amount setting
back surface E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
magnification ratio (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
adjustment (Sub F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 DSPF: 30
scan) (SIDE2) image loss amount setting RSPF: 20
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 DSPF: 20
7(67 &/26(
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting RSPF: 30
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
(RSPF only)
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖ %˖ ˖6,'( Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( is increased.
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
2.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.
[DSPF-installed model]
50-7
Purpose Adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(1763)&$/&
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and $˖ ˖/
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch +˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
panel.
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
(;(&87(
DSPF/RSPF duplex mode.
4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
surement value of distance a (DSPF/RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the
unit of 0.1mm.
(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 76
[RSPF-installed model]
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image off-center posi-
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)&$/&
tion. (The adjustment is made separately
$˖
$˖ ˖/
for each paper feed section.)
%˖ ˖/
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
Section
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Large capacity tray)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
J SUB-CS12 timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
ǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 77
50-12
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Adjustment 7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center $˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
position adjustment. (The adjustment is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
[DSPF-installed model] [RSPF-installed model]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖/($'B('*(2& 6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ %˖ ˖)5217B5($52& $˖ ˖/($'B('*(2&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖75$,/B('*(2& $˖ %˖ ˖)5217B5($52&
'˖ ˖/($'B('*(63)B6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖75$,/B('*(2&
(˖ ˖)5217B5($563)B6,'(
)$; 6&$11(5 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 78
(4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center
50-28
(Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Purpose Adjustment 1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image 2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust-
loss, void area, image off-center, and image ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
magnification ratio.
3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
Section (Two or more trays can be selected.)
Operation/Procedure 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
SIM50-28. 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
* Print image magnification ratio adjustment When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the proce-
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) dure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment pat-
* Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) tern printed with each paper.
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 7) Press [OK] key.
* Scan image off-center adjustment RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
* Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section) REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
* Copy image position, image loss adjustment RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Adjustment operation data display
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 79
Setting Default
Display/Item Content
range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(DSPF) (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN _ HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A SIDE1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(RSPF) (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A SIDE2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
(RSPF) value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size)
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 70
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 70
O ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
P ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
R ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
S DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
T DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
U DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
V DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 30
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 80
<Small size, Large size>
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
than the LT size (216mm).
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
than the LT size (216mm).
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is [DSPF-installed model]
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is 63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
changed by 0.1mm.) 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
[DSPF-installed model]
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$˖ %˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B/2:
'˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B/2:
(;(&87(
(˖ ˖5$1'20B3/$,1B+,*+
)˖ ˖5$1'20B3/$,1B/2:
[RSPF-installed model]
*˖ǂ ˖5$1'20B7+,1B+,*+
+˖ǂ ˖5$1'20B7+,1B/2:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
5(*, 5(*, (1*,1( 2. 75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
[RSPF-installed model]
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$˖ %˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B/2: 53-7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B+,*+ Purpose Adjustment
'˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B/2:
6,'( 6,'( (1*,1( 2.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document
size width sensor.
Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure
53 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
53-6
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
DSPF/RSPF document width.
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
Section B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
Operation/Procedure C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
1) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
width.
[DSPF-installed model]
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
3) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. 7(67
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
&/26(
%˖ $'B3
The A4R width detection level is recognized. ˷̚˹ &˖ $'B3
5) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. '˖ $'B0,1
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 81
[RSPF-installed model]
55
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
55-1
$˖ ˖$'B0$; Purpose Setting
$˖ %˖ ˖$'B3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖$'B3
control operations. (SOFT SW)
'˖ ˖$'B0,1
2. Section
Operation/Procedure
53-8
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- '$7$ 䋺
ment>
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A ADJUST DSPF/RSPF mode document 1 - 99 5
VALUE scan position adjustment
(;(&87(
(Scanner stop position
adjustment)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0)362)76:6(77,1*
6:1R 䋺 6:1R̚
'$7$ 䋺
(;(&87(
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 82
(Machine with the DSK installed)
56 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
56-1 <IMPORT>
Purpose Data transfer From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
PWB.) (HDD-installed machine) 3) Enter the password with 10-key.
Section 4) Press [SET] key.
Operation/Procedure 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
1) Select a target content of data transfer. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
<Data list outside the backup targets>
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. (EEPROM/SRAM)
ALL HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD. PWB Type Content NOTE
HDD ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the Controller Machine serial No.
memories. Product key information
EEPROM HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD Various counter Copy counter/FAX
HDD EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM send counter etc.
SRAM HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD. Trouble history
(Including the FAX memory) PCU Machine serial No.
When the FAX memory or an option memory Various counter Maintenance counter
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the Machine adjustment execute
memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD. history
HDD SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM Trouble history
(including the FAX memory) SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
When the FAX memory or an option memory Trouble history
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the
FAX memory are also transferred to HDD. (HDD)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 83
56-3
60
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
60-1
the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine)
Purpose Operation test/check
Section HDD
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
Operation/Procedure
of the MFP PWB memory.
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
<EXPORT> Start the test.
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
Result display Description
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. OK Success
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. NG Fail
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. INVALID Execution disable
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6'5$05($':5,7(7(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
56-4
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
(;(&87(
USB memory. (HDD-installed machine)
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure 60-2
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Purpose Setting
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the MFP
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. PWB on-board SDRAM.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Section MFP (ICU) PWB
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Operation/Procedure
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(;3257-2%/2*'$7$
-2%/2*(;3257
3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: Set to the default value.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0
ENABLE setting setting
change of On-
flag board
SPD
ENABLE DDR 1
setting
of B or
later
B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
OF ROW 12BIT width 1
13BIT 2
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 84
1 : '10/Jun/01
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value 61
C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
OF 9BIT width 1
COLUMN 61-1
10BIT 2
11BIT 3 Purpose Operation test/check
12BIT 4 Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1 tion and laser detection.
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
Section LSU
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Operation/Procedure
5CLOCK 3
E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SETTING 5CLOCK 1 When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
VALUE 6CLOCK 2 In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
7CLOCK 3
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3 Display Content
SETTING 7CLOCK 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
VALUE 8CLOCK 2 LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4
G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
/687(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
VALUE - -
20CLOCK 1 (;(&87(
3
J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
LATENC CL=2.5 1 61-3
Y CL=3 2
K TOTAL NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
Purpose Setting
NUMBER 128M total capacity 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
OF BYTE Section LSU
MBYTES 256M 2
ON BYTE
Operation/Procedure
BOARD 1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
DDR FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel.
L NUMBER NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
OF ON 1CHIP bunk number 1
BOARD-
panel.
SELECT
DDR 2CHIP 2 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
CS-BANK SELECT 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( line images are increased.
6'5$06(77,1*
$˖ ˖6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖ %˖ ˖180%(52)52:%,7 Setting
Item/Display Content
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖180%(52)&2/801%,7 range
'˖ ˖7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. COPY 600dps A LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
(˖ ˖75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
(BW1) setting/BW1
)˖ ˖75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
*˖ ˖75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
B LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
+˖ ˖7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. (BW2) setting/BW2
,˖ ˖7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. C LASER DUTY Laser DUTY 0 - 255
-˖ ˖&$6/$7(1&<&/
(BW) select/BW
.˖ ˖727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7(
COPY 1200dpi A LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
/˖ ˖180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7
2.
(MX-M363/ (BW1) setting/BW1
M453/M503 N B LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
1
only) (BW2) setting/BW2
C LASER DUTY Laser DUTY 0 - 255
(BW) select/BW
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
(BW1) setting/BW1
B LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
(BW2) setting/BW2
C LASER DUTY Laser DUTY 0 - 255
(BW) select/BW
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 85
1 : '10/Jun/01
Setting
Item/Display Content
range 62
PR1200 A LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
(MX-M363/ (BW1) setting/BW1
M453/M503 N 62-1
B LASER POWER Laser power 0 - 255
1
only) (BW2) setting/BW2 Purpose Data clear/Reset
C LASER DUTY Laser DUTY 0 - 255 Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
(BW) select/BW
(except operation manual area).
[MX-M363/M453/M503 N] * If no HDD is installed, the MFP Flash
memory is formatted.
Default value
Category Item Section HDD
36PPM 45/50PPM
COPY 600dpi A 89 111 Operation/Procedure
B 89 111 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
C 0 0 2) Press [YES] key.
COPY 1200dpi A 89 111
Used to execute the hard disk format. Used to execute the
B 89 111
MFP PWB flash memory format.
C 0 0
PR600/FAX A 89 111 When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
B 89 111 normal display.
C 40 40
PR1200 A 89 111 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
B 89 111 +'')250$7
C 0 0
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(5$8726(783>),(5<@
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
$˖ ˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<.
˖/$6(532:(5%:
$˖ %˖ ˖/$6(532:(5%:
˖/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<&
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
$˖ ˖/$6(532:(5%:
$˖ %˖ ˖/$6(532:(5%:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/$6(5'87<%:
62-3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write operations are performed.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 86
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(67$// 60$57(5525/2*35,17287
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
(;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-8
62-6 Purpose Data clear/Reset
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the the system area and the operation manual
hard disk. area)
normal display.
+'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
60$572))/,1(7(67
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
6+25767 ˖(1$%/(
(;7(1'('67 ˖',6$%/(
62-10
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
(HDD-installed machine)
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 87
62-11 62-13
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data. Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
(HDD-installed machine) operation manual and watermark area)
Section HDD Section HDD
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data. The operation manual data are deleted.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display. normal display.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5 +'')250$70$18$/:$7(50$5.$5($21/<
62-12
Purpose Setting 63
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble. 63-1
Section HDD Purpose Information display
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. result.
2) Press [OK] key. Section Scanner
The set value is saved. Operation/Procedure
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system 1) Select a mode.
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system 2) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] key on the touch
data storage area is cleared. panel. (For the U model, the key operations can be made but
the displayed data of each color is the same.)
A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default) Item/Display Content NOTE
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value
(odd number)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/(
(Even number)
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖ OFFSET Offset value
˷̚˹ ODD (odd number)
OFFSET Offset value
EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
2.
TARGET Target value
VALUE
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL
[N model]
63-3
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Purpose Adjustment
6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<
*$,12'' Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color
*$,1(9(1 balance and gamma auto adjustment.
2))6(72''
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/67
ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/1' up on the DSPF tray.
0$;'(16,7<
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
% * 5 2& '63)
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 89
1 : '10/Jun/01
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key. (For the U model, the 2&
key operations can be made but the displayed data of each color is
the same.)
&&&555
[N model] 000***
<<<%%%
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&
% * 5 㪛㪪㪧㪝 (;(&87(
2&
[U model]
&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
2&
% * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2&
[U model] % * 5 2&
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 63-5
2&
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS)
color balance and gamma default setting.
% * 5 2& Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1 1) Select [SIDE A(OC)] key or [SIDE B(DSPF)] key. (For the
63-4 RSPF-installed model, only the [SIDE A (OC)] key is dis-
played.)
Purpose Information display
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
The scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma are set to
Section Scanner the default. (For the U model, only the gamma is set.)
Operation/Procedure
1 [DSPF-installed model]
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside up ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
on the DSPF tray. 6,'($2& 6,'(%'63)
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys. (For the U
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
model, the key operations can be made but the displayed data of 7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
each color is the same.) 6,'($2&
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 90
1 : '10/Jun/01
64
64-2
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Pattern
Content Pattern generating section NOTE
No.
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC
2 Dot print -
9 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10 Belt print
11 Dot print (sub scan)
15 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Sub scan) MFP ASIC • 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Main scan) • The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
17 Halftone pattern (all over the page) Controller (Memory) -
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) -
19 256 gradations pattern (straight) 600dpi -
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC
22 Slant line
1 29 Dot print 1200dpi MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N only
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 91
1 : '10/Jun/01
Pattern
Content Pattern generating section NOTE
No.
33 Halftone pattern 1200dpi (all over the page) Controller (Memory) MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N only
1 34 256 gradation pattern 1200dpi MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N only
35 256 gradation pattern (straight) 1200dpi MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N only
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51̚̚̚
$˖ %˖ ˖'27'27˚˙,)$
*˖ ˖3$3(5&6
+˖ ˖'83/(;12
,˖ ˖3$3(5ǂ7<3(3/$,1
(;(&87( 2.
64-4
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
* This simulation functions only for the
machines which are provided with the
printer function.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 92
1 : '10/Jun/01
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,17
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
$˖ %˖ ˖'(16,7<
)˖ ˖',7+(5&$/,%
*˖ ˖3$3(57<3(3/$,1
64-5
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,173&/
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
%˖ %˖ ˖',7+(5&$/,%
)˖ ˖721(56$9(02'(2))
*˖ ˖3$3(57<3(3/$,1
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 93
1 : '10/Jun/01
64-6
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,1736
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
%˖ %˖ ˖',7+(5&$/,%
)˖ ˖721(56$9(02'(2))
*˖ ˖3$3(57<3(3/$,1
65
65-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
play section) detection coordinates.
Section Operation unit
(Operation/Display control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 94
65-2
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Purpose Information display 7(67 &/26(
23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis- 3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(<
;<
67
67-17
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Printer controller reset
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
65-5 The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
Purpose Operation test/check NIC setting.)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
input. normal display.
Section Operation unit
(Operation/Display control PWB) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5
Operation panel
JOB STATUS $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
SYSTEM SETTINGS
HOME
1
2
67-25
3 Purpose Adjustment
4 Function (Purpose) Printer density adjustment (Manual adjust-
5 ment)
6 * This simulation functions only for the
7 machines which are provided with the
8 printer option function.
9
Section
AUDIT CLEAR
0 Operation/Procedure
PROGRAM 1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
CLEAR touch panel.
STOP 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CLEAR ALL/RESET
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
START (MONO)
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the density corresponding to the adjustment value.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 95
1 : '10/Jun/01
Screen Content
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper mode
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit screen
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
1 SCREEN2 1200dpi 1 bit screen
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 (MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N only)
'˖ ˖32,17
SCREEN3 Toner Save mode
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
Setting Default
+˖ ˖32,17 Item/Display Content
,˖ ˖32,17
range value
-˖ ˖32,17 A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
.˖ ˖32,17 B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
/˖ ˖32,17
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
67-31 G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
Purpose Data clear/Reset
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
(Half-tone process control data). K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
* This simulation functions only for the L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
machines which are provided with the M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
printer option function. N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
Section O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
. (;(&87( 2.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 96
67-34
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
printer high density section. (Support for
the high density section tone gap)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$˖ ˖(1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖
˷̚˹
2.
67-70
Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
65$0&/($5
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 – 97
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
MX-M503N C. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, may not be stopped.
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
conditions.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬऔ the cause. કΩȜΜ۟¦༞ݯ
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Reset
໘ܦ
Standby
ఞેܥఠ state
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan FAST
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print Notification
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption) to host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30, ✕ ✕ ✕
97, 98)
HDD trouble E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC trouble E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
SCU communication E7 (80) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble A0 (02)
PCU communication E7 (90) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble A0 (01)
ACU communication A0 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Controller fan motor trouble L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
External communication U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable (RIC)
Memory error (included not U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 10
installed the expansion 23, 24)
RAM)
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60, 61, 65) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
detection) A0 (10, 11, 12, 15, 20)
Serial number discrepancy U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD registration data sum U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
error
If the HDD is not installed,
data check sum error of the
Flash memory for setting
and registration.
Image memory trouble, E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
decode error 09)
Image memory trouble, E7 (42, 46, 48) ✕ 11 ✕ ✕ ✕
decode error (ACRE-
related 1)
Image memory trouble, E7 (49) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
decode error (ACRE-
related 2)
Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
installation trouble
Power controller trouble L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Special function error U2 (60)
MFP Flash memory access E7 (31) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
error
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 21, 28, 29), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
L6 (10) 7
Connection trouble E7 (50, 55) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(PCU detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10), ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(motor, fusing, etc.) F2 (40, 64, 70, 74), 7
H2 (00, 02),
H3 (00, 02),
H4 (00, 02),
H5 (01),
H7 (10, 12),
L4 (02, 03, 04, 11, 31,
32, 34, 43, 58, 59),
L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3 (22) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6 (01) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6 (02) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 2 2 2/7 2
(09, 20, 21, 22, 51)
Paper feed tray other U6 (00, 10, 50) 8 8 7/8 8
troubles
Staple trouble F1 (08, 10) 3 3 3 3 3 3/7 3 3
Saddle stitch section F1 (31, 41, 43, 45, 47) 3 3 3 3 3 3/7 3 3
trouble
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when on, check is made in each
initializing and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
Trouble content
E6-11 DSPF (CIS) shading error Detail MFP
(White correction) Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CIS unit harness.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the reference white plate.
E7-05 Standard/Extension memory R/W
CIS unit trouble. error (MFP PWB) (Local memory)
DSPF PWB trouble.
Shading adjustment error
Trouble content Memory access is disabled.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CIS unit.
Detail MFP
Clean the reference white plate.
Cause Improper insertion of the memory.
Check the CIS unit.
Garbled memory data.
Check the DSPF PWB.
The memory capacity is not the specified level.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
E6-14 CIS-ASIC error memory.
Replace the expansion memory.
Trouble content Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the DSPF PWB.
E7-42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) E7-60 Combination error between the MFP
PWB and other PWB, firmware
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Image transfer trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check the connection state of the ACRE ASIC PWB Detail MFP
connector. Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected.
E7-46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC)
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Compression data abnormality. E7-61 Combination error between the MFP
Garbled data are produced in image compression/
transmission.
PWB and the PCU PWB
ACRE ASIC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the installation state of the PWB. Trouble content
Check connection of the ACRE ASIC PWB. Detail MFP
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
PCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
E7-48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail MFP
Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause DIMM trouble, memory slot trouble.
DIMM insertion trouble, different DIMM inserted.
Check & Remedy DIMM trouble. E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error
Replace the PWB.
Trouble content
E7-49 Water Mark data error Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
Trouble content
Malfunction due to noises.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Cause Watermark data trouble Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble content
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
Detail PCU
trouble Cause Motor lock trouble.
Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Trouble content Lift motor trouble. Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. SIM3-3.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
tray lift motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor. F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble
Trouble content
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock trouble.
Trouble content Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the saddle motor with SIM3-3.
Motor speed abnormality. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Over-current to the motor. Replace the control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-32 Finisher - Punch unit communication
Replace the paper alignment motor F. error
Trouble content
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
Detail PCU
R Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or
disconnection between the finisher and the punch
Trouble content unit.
Detail PCU Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Malfunction due to noises.
Motor speed abnormality.
The punch unit is in the adjustment mode.
Over-current to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper finisher and the punch unit.
alignment motor R. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the paper alignment motor R. Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
Trouble content Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the Trouble content
finisher saddle transport section. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
Fuse blown (24V line). Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Replace the PCU PWB.
paper transport motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB. F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble
Replace the sensor.
Trouble content
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error Detail PCU
Cause Toner clutch trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Trouble content Connector/harness trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit Toner cartridge trouble.
model is installed. Developing unit trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner clutch.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-31 Image density sensor trouble Replace the developing unit.
(OPC drum surface reflection ratio
abnormality) F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM) trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content Trouble content
Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Thermistor trouble. level within the specified time from turning ON the
PCU PWB trouble power relay.
Connection trouble of the fusing section connector Thermistor trouble.
and the harness. Heater lamp trouble.
HL PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Thermostat trouble.
heater lamp. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. HL PWB trouble.
Replace the thermistor. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the HL PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature Replace the HL PWB.
trouble (TH_US) Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble. H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
PCU PWB trouble.
HL PWB trouble. Fusing section connector connection
jam
trouble.
HL PWB trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Detail PCU
heater lamp. Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. remains.)
Check connection of the thermistor and the harness. POD1 sensor trouble.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit section. Fusing unit installation trouble.
(When the lamp is ON:) Check the HL PWB and the Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB lamp circuit. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermistor, the HL PWB, and the PCU Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
PWB. Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content Trouble content HDD/MFP Flash data check sum error (MFP PWB
Detail MFP detection)
Cause The identifier which controls the communication Detail MFP
management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX Cause HDD/MFP PWB Flash memory data check sum error
soft switch is not detected correctly. (when HDD is not installed)
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. • Address book
MFP PWB trouble. • Image send series registration data (Sender record,
Strong external noises. meta data, etc.)
Check & Remedy Since the data of the communication management • Job end list (FAX/Internet FAX/scanner job only),
table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are etc.
initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted Error in write/read circuit to HDD or MFP Flash
data again individually. memory
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Malfunctions caused by noises
Replace the MFP PWB. MFP PWB HSS access circuit error
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Check the following data for any abnormality. If there
U2-23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual is any abnormality, reset and register the content.
• Address book
data check sum error • Image send series registration data (Sender record,
meta data, etc.)
Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum • Job end list (FAX/Internet FAX/scanner job only),
error. etc.
Detail MFP Replace the HDD.
Cause The check sum value for individual data of the Replace the MFP PWB.
communication table and the sender registration does
not match.
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. U2-60 Water Mark check error
MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related to Detail MFP
the content of check sum error.
Cause Watermark data trouble
Since the registered contents are deleted, register the
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
deleted contents again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Replace the MFP PWB.
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
SCU PWB trouble.
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
Replace the SCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
PCU PWB trouble
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
and the adjustment values.
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
on the new PWB.
Replace the MFP PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause When two or more document feed units are detected.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Document feeder trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail SCU A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble). (MFP - SCU)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the
SCU.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
Detail MFP SCU.
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. A0-15 DSK BOOT version disagreement
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again. Trouble content
Replace the ROM. Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the DSK and the
BOOT.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the DSK and the
BOOT.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
*1: The distance (length) divided by the process speed is the time.
Process speed 28/36 PPM Model 175mm/sec
45/50 PPM Model 225mm/sec
(2) DSPF
(4) Option
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for
storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
2) Enter the SIM49-01. ,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
the update screen. /$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
'(6.%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
'(6.0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6
(
5(0$,16)25
0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* The number of key changes according to the number of the
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
displayed.
appears.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
played.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG
@ &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
&21),* ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( ˖&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& ˖&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 ˖&855(1783'$7('72
2.
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
the firmware. [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-M503N
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-
tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5
• The JOB No. indicates the title number of the adjustment item described in the chapter of the adjustments.
• Refer to the details based on this number according to necessity.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 1
2. Contents of the maintenance codes (Relationship between various counters values
and display messages)
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the specified value.
The relationships between the kinds of messages and counters are as shown below.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 2
Message when end over
F. Toner cartridge section counters
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions Toner preparation message
“0” “1”
Sim.26-69A
Print Enable Print Stop Near end Sim.26-69A
Sensor name “1”
Drum cartridge 36/45/50 CPM Message (8) Message (8) conditions “0”
Not
print counter (K) model: 200,000 Displayed
displayed
[sheets]
Toner remaining Total toner supply Message (10)
28 CPM model:
quantity sensor time (Equivalent to
150,000 [sheets]
(K) 25% or less of
Drum accumulated 930K rotations Message (8) Message (8)
toner remaining
rotation number (K)
quantity)
Drum cartridge 9999 days — —
usage days (K) Japan: Not displayed, EX Japan: Displayed
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum cartridge print Message when near end over
counter or the drum rotations accumulated number counter. Sim.26-69B
Near end Sim.26-69B
Sensor name “1”
Message Print job conditions “0”
Message Not
No. Enable/Disable Displayed
displayed
(8) Maintenance required.Code: DK Enable Toner remaining When a low toner Message (12)
quantity sensor state continues for
• After completion of maintenance, clear the drum counter of
(K) more than the
SIM24-7 (the drum print counter and the drum accumulated trav- specified time (*1)
eling distance).
Japan: Not displayed, EX Japan: Displayed
E. Developer section counters
Message when end over
Message when near end over Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Counter name End conditions
Counter name “0” “1”
conditions “0” “1” Print Enable Print Stop
Print Enable Print stop Toner remaining When the pixel Message (11) Message (11)
Developer No criteria quantity sensor count value
cartridge print (K) reaches the
counter (K) specified level
Developer No criteria — — from the near end
cartridge condition. (*2)
accumulated
traveling distance
(K) Message Print job
Message
No. Enable/Disable
Developer No criteria — —
cartridge usage (10) Prepare a new one Enable
days (K) (11) Change the toner cartridge. K Disable
(Displayed with parentheses)
(12) K Toner supply is low. Enable
Message when end over
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 3
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Photo- Drum – Replace even at the
conductor specified RPM.
section Storage period is 3 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
Cleaner blade – Replace at 200K of the
drum counter or 2 years
of use.
Toner reception seal –
Toner reception side –
sheet F/R
Toner reception –
lower molt
Side seal F/R –
Drum separation –
pawl unit
MC unit ✕
Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
Developing Developer – Replace even at the
section specified RPM.
Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
DV seal – Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
DV side seal F/R –
Toner filter – Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
Connector – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
supply Replace after 2 years of
section use.
LSU Dust-proof glass ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section
Transfer Transfer roller ✕ Replace at 200K or 2
section years of use.
Discharge plate ✕
Transfer roller –
bearing F and R
Transfer roller collar –
Transfer rear star – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
ring
Transfer roller gear ✕
Pre-transfer paper
guide
Process control ✕ Air cleaning
sensor
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 4
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Fusing Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower
section heat roller unit. / Replace
at 200K or 2 years of use.
Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
grease when assembling
to the heat roller.
Upper separation ✕ When a foreign material
pawl is attached, it must be
Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ cleaned away.
Lower separation ✕
pawl
Web pressure roller ✕
bearing
Web pressure roller ✕
Web roller ✕
Web 45T gear ✕
Fusing paper exit ✕
roller
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Paper guides
Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper
heat roller unit. / Replace
at 200K or 2 years of use.
Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper
gear heat roller unit.
Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
Upper heat roller ✕ grease when assembling
heat-insulation bush to the heat roller.
Filter Ozone filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section
Paper feed Paper pick-up roller ✕ Replacement reference:
section Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to
Separation roller ✕ each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
100K
Manual feed: 100K
Transport rollers ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper
guides
Paper Resist roller (Idle) ✕
transport Paper dust removing
section unit
Transport rollers ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper
guides
Duplex/ Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
paper exit Transport rollers ✕
section Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
Transport paper
guides
Drive Gears (Grease) – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
section Shaft earth sections – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ the necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
Belts – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 5
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Scanner Mirror/Lens/
section Reflection sheet/
CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner N model: ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the LED
lamp LED section
PWB
U model:
Xenon
lamp
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DSPF Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
section Pickup roller Replace according to
Separation roller each paper feed counter
value.
SPF section roller:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to
Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ each paper feed counter
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
limiter: Replace at 400K
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers
No. 1 scanning plate
No. 2 scanning
section, scanning
glass
No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass
CIS unit ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the Selfoc
lens section.
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC mat
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
RSPF Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
section Pickup roller Replace according to
Separation roller each paper feed counter
value.
SPF section roller:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to
Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ each paper feed counter
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
limiter: Replace at 400K
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers
Scanning plate
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC mat
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 6
Option
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Inner Transport rollers ✕
finisher/ Transport paper ✕
Punch unit guides
for Inner Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
finisher the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
Paddle ✕ Replace at every 1000K
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Saddle Transport rollers
stitch Transport paper
finisher guides
(1K)/Punch Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
unit for the necessary positions.
Saddle Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
stitch
Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
finisher
Replace at every 1000K
(1K)
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
(For saddle finisher)
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Staple cartridge (For Replacement is made by the user at every 2,000 pcs.
saddle finisher)
Finisher Transport rollers
(4K)/Punch Transport paper
unit for guides
Finisher Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
(4K) the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Paper Transport rollers
pass unit Transport paper
guides
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
A4 large Pickup roller/ ✕ Replacement reference:
capacity Paper feed rollers Replace according to
tray each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.: 100K
Transport rollers ✕
Transport paper
guides
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 7
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕ Replacement reference:
tray (Desk) Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to
Separation roller ✕ each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.: 100K
Transport rollers ✕
Transport paper
guides
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Photo- Drum – Replace even at the
conductor specified RPM.
section Storage period is 3 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
Cleaner blade – Replace at 150K of the
drum counter or 2 years
of use.
Toner reception seal –
Toner reception side –
sheet F/R
Toner reception –
lower molt
Side seal F/R –
Drum separation –
pawl unit
MC unit ✕
Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
Developing Developer – Replace even at the
section specified RPM.
Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
DV seal – Replace at 150K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
DV side seal F/R –
Toner filter – Replace at 150K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
Connector – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
supply Replace after 2 years of
section use.
LSU Dust-proof glass ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section
Transfer Transfer roller ✕ Replace at 150K or 2
section years of use.
Discharge plate ✕
Transfer roller –
bearing F and R
Transfer roller collar –
Transfer rear star – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
ring
Transfer roller gear ✕
Pre-transfer paper
guide
Process control ✕ Air cleaning
sensor
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 8
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Fusing Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower
section heat roller unit. / Replace
at 150K or 2 years of use.
Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
grease when assembling
to the heat roller.
Upper separation ✕ When a foreign material
pawl is attached, it must be
Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ cleaned away.
Lower separation ✕
pawl
Web pressure roller ✕
bearing
Web pressure roller ✕
Web roller ✕
Web 45T gear ✕
Fusing paper exit ✕
roller
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Paper guides
Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper
heat roller unit. / Replace
at 150K or 2 years of use.
Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper
gear heat roller unit.
Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
Upper heat roller ✕ grease when assembling
heat-insulation bush to the heat roller.
Filter Ozone filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section
Paper feed Paper pick-up roller ✕ Replacement reference:
section Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to
Separation roller ✕ each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
100K
Manual feed: 100K
Transport rollers ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper
guides
Paper Resist roller (Idle) ✕
transport Paper dust
section removing unit
Transport rollers ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper
guides
Duplex/ Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
paper exit Transport rollers ✕
section Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
Transport paper
guides
Drive Gears (Grease) – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
section Shaft earth sections – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ the necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
Belts – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 9
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Scanner Mirror/Lens/
section Reflection sheet/
CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner lamp ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the LED
(LED PWB) section
Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
RSPF Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
section Pickup roller Replace according to
Separation roller each paper feed counter
value.
SPF section roller:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to
Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ each paper feed counter
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
limiter: Replace at 400K
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers
Scanning plate
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC mat
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Option
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Inner Transport rollers ✕
finisher/ Transport paper ✕
Punch unit guides
for Inner Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
finisher the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
Paddle ✕ Replace at every 1000K
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Saddle Transport rollers
stitch Transport paper
finisher guides
(1K)/Punch Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
unit for the necessary positions.
Saddle Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
stitch
Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
finisher
Replace at every 1000K
(1K)
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
(For saddle finisher)
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Staple cartridge (For Replacement is made by the user at every 2,000 pcs.
saddle finisher)
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 10
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Finisher Transport rollers
(4K)/Punch Transport paper
unit for guides
Finisher Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
(4K) the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Paper Transport rollers
pass unit Transport paper
guides
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
A4 large Pickup roller/ ✕ Replacement reference:
capacity Paper feed rollers Replace according to
tray each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.: 100K
Transport rollers ✕
Transport paper
guides
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕ Replacement reference:
tray (Desk) Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to
Separation roller ✕ each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.: 100K
Transport rollers ✕
Transport paper
guides
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 11
A. Photo-conductor section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Drum – Replace even at the specified
RPM.
Storage period is 3 years.
Replace after 2 years of use.
2 Cleaner blade – Replace at 200K of the drum
counter or 2 years of use.
3 Toner reception seal –
4 Toner reception side –
sheet F/R
5 Toner reception –
lower molt
6 Side seal F/R –
7 Drum separation –
pawl unit
8 MC unit ✕
9 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Drum – Replace even at the specified
RPM.
Storage period is 3 years.
Replace after 2 years of use.
2 Cleaner blade – Replace at 150K of the drum
counter or 2 years of use.
3 Toner reception seal –
4 Toner reception side –
sheet F/R
5 Toner reception –
lower molt
6 Side seal F/R –
7 Drum separation –
pawl unit
8 MC unit ✕
9 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
6
2
5 4
6 5
8
7
1
7
3
4
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 12
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) (1) Waste toner box replacement
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment 1) Open the front cover.
[Note]
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
• When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
5mm
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
(2) Photo-conductor unit removal
2. Prior exposure prevention
1) Remove the toner cartridge.
[Note]
[Refer to "C. Toner supply section."]
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
2) Remove the developing unit.
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time. [Refer to "B. Developing section."]
• Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using 3) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 13
4) Remove the blue screw. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and (4) Drum replacement
hold the handle to remove the unit. 1) Remove the blue screw, and rotate the fixing shaft to remove.
Slide the drum to the front side to remove.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
NOTE: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
drum by making it into contact with the separation pawl.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 14
(6) Toner reception seal, toner reception side sheets F (8) Side seals F and R replacement
and R replacement 1) Remove the side seals F and R.
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the toner reception seal. Maintenance
Maintenance 36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K. 28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K. NOTE: Attach with the cleaner blade edge as the reference so that
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of the clearance is within 0 - 0.3mm. Press to secure attach-
A and B. ment.
NOTE: Attach the toner reception side sheets F and R according to
the reference. 0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
0mm
F 0.3mm R
0.3mm
0mm
B
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
0.3mm 0.3mm
57mm
57mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
F R
Duplex tape reference Duplex tape reference
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 15
B. Developing section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Developer – Replace even at the specified
RPM.
Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of use.
2 DV seal – Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
3 DV side seal F/R –
4 Toner filter – Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
5 Connector – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Developer – Replace even at the specified
RPM.
Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of use.
2 DV seal – Replace at 150K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
3 DV side seal F/R –
4 Toner filter – Replace at 150K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
5 Connector – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5
3
2
1
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 16
1 : '10/Jun/01
(Note for servicing the DV roller) (Note for cleaning the developing unit)
1. Prevent roller contamination If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
[Note] with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit.
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface. * Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
• When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section face when transporting developer or removing foreign mate-
to rotate it. rial from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the
magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling
the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum. (Do not pinch the grounding
wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent
against damage on the cored bar.)
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily (2) Developer replacement
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method. NOTE: Supply of developer must be performed after completion of
all the maintenance works of the developing unit.
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in 1) Remove the screw, and hold the rib to remove the cover.
the image. NOTE: After installing, check to confirm that the cover is securely
engaged with the frame pawl.
(1) Developing unit removal
1) Remove the waste toner box. [Refer to "A. Photo-conductor
section."]
2) Remove the toner cartridge. [Refer to "C. Toner supply sec-
tion."]
3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 17
1 : '10/Jun/01
2) While rotating the mixing roller, discharge developer from the (4) DV seal replacement
unit. 1) Remove the DV seal.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
0.5mm 0mm
0mm
0.5mm
0.5mm 0.5mm
F R
0mm 0mm
0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 18
C. Toner supply section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of use.
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
Replace after 2 years of use.
(1) Toner cartridge replacement 2) Pull out the toner cartridge to remove.
1) Open the front cover. Maintenance: Replace every-time when toner empty. (By the
user)
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 19
D. LSU section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Dust-proof glass ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Dust-proof glass ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(1) LSU removal 3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2. LSU.
NOTE: Lift the LSU tip and insert it so that the LSU boss comes in
the frame hole. After insertion, remove the toner cartridge
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and and check.
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
A 4
1 3
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 20
1 : '10/Jun/01
E. Transfer section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transfer roller ✕ Replace at 200K or 2 years
of use.
2 Discharge plate ✕
3 Transfer roller bearing –
F and R
4 Transfer roller collar –
5 Transfer rear star ring – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Transfer roller gear ✕
7 Pre-transfer paper guide
8 Process control sensor ✕ Air cleaning
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transfer roller ✕ Replace at 150K or 2 years
of use.
2 Discharge plate ✕
3 Transfer roller bearing –
F and R
4 Transfer roller collar –
5 Transfer rear star ring – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Transfer roller gear ✕
7 Pre-transfer paper guide
8 Process control sensor ✕ Air cleaning
5 4
6
5
5
5
3
5
5
2
43
7
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 21
(1) Transfer unit removal NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. gear and the transfer roller collar.
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
2) Remove the transfer roller collar and the transfer roller bearing
F from the holder.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing F and the holder boss securely.
NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller col-
lar.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 22
F. Fusing section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower heat
roller unit. / Replace at 200K or
2 years of use.
2 Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower heat
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease when
assembling to the heat roller.
3 Upper separation pawl ✕ When a foreign material is
4 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ attached, it must be cleaned
5 Lower separation pawl ✕ away.
6 Web pressure roller ✕
bearing
7 Web pressure roller ✕
8 Web roller ✕
9 Web 45T gear ✕
10 Fusing paper exit roller ✕
11 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
12 Paper guides
13 Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper heat
roller unit. / Replace at 200K or
2 years of use.
14 Upper heat roller gear ✕ Replace with the upper heat
roller unit.
15 Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper heat
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease when
16 Upper heat roller heat- ✕ assembling to the heat roller.
insulation bush
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower heat
roller unit. / Replace at 150K or
2 years of use.
2 Lower heat roller ✕ Replace with the lower heat
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease when
assembling to the heat roller.
3 Upper separation pawl ✕ When a foreign material is
4 Thermistor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ attached, it must be cleaned
5 Lower separation pawl ✕ away.
6 Web pressure roller ✕
bearing
7 Web pressure roller ✕
8 Web roller ✕
9 Web 45T gear ✕
10 Fusing paper exit roller ✕
11 Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
12 Paper guides
13 Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper heat
roller unit. / Replace at 150K or
2 years of use.
14 Upper heat roller gear ✕ Replace with the upper heat
roller unit.
15 Upper heat roller ✕ Replace with the upper heat
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease when
16 Upper heat roller heat- ✕ assembling to the heat roller.
insulation bush
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 23
3
13 15
4 16
3 14
4
1
5
8
15
16
2
17
9
11
6
11 6
7
11 Grease Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease 11
UKOG-0012QSZZ
12
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
11
Grease 10
UKOG-0235FCZZ
12
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 24
(1) Fusing unit replacement (3) Web pressure roller bearing and web pressure
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. roller replacement
1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the harness. Remove the blue screw, and
remove the web unit.
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit.
2) Remove the web spring, and remove the web pressure roller
bearing. Remove the web pressure roller
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 25
2) Remove the left and the right springs, and remove the web 4) Remove two web tension shafts.
operation shaft. * When installing, insert the rear side first. Note that the front
side (gear side) of the shaft is narrower.
[Route diagram]
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 26
[Note for installation] NOTE: When installing the separation pawl unit to the fusing unit,
Turn the gear (B) in the arrow direction, and set so that the lead arrange so that the long hole of the unit is fit with the hook
edge of the green line (A) of the web roller can be seen. section of the fusing unit.
B A
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 27
2) Open the paper guide. Release the spring edge on the paper (9) Upper heat roller, upper heat roller gear, upper
guide side from the paper guide spring stopper. Precisely heat roller insulation bush, and upper heat roller
speaking, slide the spring edge and push it down to the back bearing replacement
surface of the paper guide. In addition, disengage the lower
1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
separation pawl from the lower separation pawl shaft side
where the spring is attached. Remove the spring from the
lower separation pawl.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
NOTE: When installing the spring, pass the spring hook through
the hole in the lower separation pawl.
NOTE: When installing the lower separation pawl, first install the
shaft which is not provided with the spring to the paper
guide.
3) Remove the blue screw, the ground plate, and the paper guide
unit.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 28
5) Remove the roller stopper from the upper heat roller, and
remove the upper heat roller gear, the upper heat roller insula-
tion bush, and the upper heat roller bearing.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
G. Filter section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Ozone filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Ozone filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 29
H. Paper feed section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Paper pick-up roller ✕ Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to each
3 Separation roller ✕ paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: Replace
at 100K or 1 year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at 100K
or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: 100K
Manual feed: 100K
5 Transport rollers ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
7 Transport paper guides
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Paper pick-up roller ✕ Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to each
3 Separation roller ✕ paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: Replace
at 100K or 1 year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at 100K
or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: 100K
Manual feed: 100K
5 Transport rollers ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
7 Transport paper guides
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 30
1
2
4
5 6
6
6 6
6
3
2
6 6
1 5
1
6 6
5 2
6
4 4
6 6
3 3
5 5
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 31
(1) Manual paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper (2) Manual paper feed unit torque limiter replacement
feed roller, and separation roller replacement 1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
1) Remove the pickup cover.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller 2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
(B). the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
2 Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever.
3
1
1
3
4
5
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 32
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R. 8) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector. 9) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1
2
6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual 10) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
feed tray unit.
1
3
2
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 33
(3) Tray paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper feed 4) Remove the separation roller.
roller, and separation roller replacement Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2. counter.
3) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 34
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front. 7) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
1
2
9) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the sep-
aration shift. Remove the torque limiter.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
3 2
1 4
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 35
I. Paper transport section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Resist roller (Idle) ✕
2 Paper dust removing unit
3 Transport rollers ✕
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Transport paper guides
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Resist roller (Idle) ✕
2 Paper dust removing unit
3 Transport rollers ✕
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Transport paper guides
3
1
4
4
3
(1) Resist roller (idle), and each transport roller 2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
cleaning transport roller 8 (Drive) (C).
1) Open the right door. Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Clean at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Clean at every 150K.
B C
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 36
J. Duplex/Paper exit section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Transport rollers ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
5 Transport paper guides
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Transport rollers ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
5 Transport paper guides
3 3
Grease 1
UKOG-0307FCZZ
3 3
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 37
(1) Each transport roller cleaning 4) Open the right door.
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Clean at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Clean at every 150K.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 38
K. Drive section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Gears (Grease) – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
2 Shaft earth sections – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Gears (Grease) – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to the
2 Shaft earth sections – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts – ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
1
Grease 2
UKOG-0299 Grease
FCZZ UKOG-0012QSZZ
3 1
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 39
L. Scanner section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Mirror/Lens/
Reflection sheet (Reflector)/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF glass
3 Scanner N model: LED PWB ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the
lamp LED section
U model: Xenon lamp
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
5 Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Mirror/Lens/
Reflection sheet/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF glass
3 Scanner lamp (LED PWB) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the
LED section
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
5 Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 4
2
2
4
5
6
5
5
1
1
N model U model
3
1 3
1 1
1 1
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 40
M. DSPF section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
2 Pickup roller Replace according to each
3 Separation roller paper feed counter value.
SPF section roller: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to each
5 Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ paper feed counter value.
(for PIC) SPF section torque limiter:
Replace at 400K or 2 years of
use.
6 Transport rollers
7 No. 1 scanning plate
8 No. 2 scanning section,
scanning glass
9 No. 2 scanning section,
white reference glass
10 CIS unit ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air cleaning for the Selfoc
lens section.
11 Paper exit roller
12 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
13 OC mat
14 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
14 14
5
2
4
1
3
6
10
13
7
6
8
9
11
12
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 41
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 42
N. RSPF section
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 100 120 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k 0k 0k k k k k k k
1 Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
2 Pickup roller Replace according to each
3 Separation roller paper feed counter value.
SPF section roller: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to each
5 Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ paper feed counter value.
(for PIC) SPF section torque limiter:
Replace at 400K or 2 years of
use.
6 Transport rollers
7 Scanning plate
8 Paper exit roller
9 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 OC mat
11 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
2 Pickup roller Replace according to each
3 Separation roller paper feed counter value.
SPF section roller: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to each
5 Call-in torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ paper feed counter value.
(for PIC) SPF section torque limiter:
Replace at 400K or 2 years of
use.
6 Transport rollers
7 Scanning plate
8 Paper exit roller
9 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
10 OC mat
11 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
11 11
5
2
4
1
3
6
10
7
6
8
9
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 43
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 44
O. Inner finisher/Punch unit for Inner finisher
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers ✕
– Transport paper guides ✕
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
Finisher count value of
1000K.
3 Paddle ✕
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 200K stapling.
7 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 1000K punching.
8 Staple cartridge User replacement for every use of 5,000 pcs.
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers ✕
– Transport paper guides ✕
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
Finisher count value of
1000K.
3 Paddle ✕
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 200K stapling.
7 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 1000K punching.
8 Staple cartridge User replacement for every use of 5,000 pcs.
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 45
1
1
1
1 1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4 4
4 4
4
4 4 4
4 4
4
5
3
2
3
3
5
3 6
5
3 8
3
2
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 46
P. Saddle stitch finisher (1K)/Punch unit for Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers
– Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
– Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace at every 1000K of
the finisher paper exit count
value.
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
5 Stapler unit for saddle Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
6 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
7 Staple cartridge User replacement for every 5000pcs.
8 Staple cartridge for saddle User replacement for every 2000pcs.
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers
– Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
– Knurling belt ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace at every 1000K of
the finisher paper exit count
value.
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
4 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
5 Stapler unit for saddle Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
6 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
7 Staple cartridge User replacement for every 5000pcs.
8 Staple cartridge for saddle User replacement for every 2000pcs.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 6
7
2 2
2 2
1
2
2
2 7
2 1
2
2 1
2 4
2 2 5
8
2 2
3
2 2 1
2
1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 47
Q. Finisher (4K)/Punch unit for Finisher (4K)
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers
– Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
– Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
4 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
– Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers
– Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
– Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
– Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
4 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
– Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
1 1 1 1 3 1 1 4
2
2
2 2
2
2 2 2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2 2
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 48
R. Paper pass unit
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers ✕
– Transport paper guides ✕
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Transport rollers ✕
– Transport paper guides ✕
2 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 49
S. A4 large capacity tray
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Pickup roller/ ✕ Replacement reference:
Paper feed rollers Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
2 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K
3 Transport rollers ✕
4 Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
5 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Pickup roller/ ✕ Replacement reference:
Paper feed rollers Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
2 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K
3 Transport rollers ✕
4 Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
5 Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6
6
2
3
6
1
1 6
6 5
1
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 50
T. Paper feed tray (Desk)
36/45/50 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Pickup roller ✕ Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to each
3 Separation roller ✕ paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K
5 Transport rollers ✕
– Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28 CPM model
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
No. Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
1 Pickup roller ✕ Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller ✕ Replace according to each
3 Separation roller ✕ paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K
5 Transport rollers ✕
– Transport paper guides
– Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
1
5
4
2
3
5
4
5
3
2
1
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 – 51
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
MX-M503N
Service Manual
offset
(GB) 0 1 2 3 4
Outer
tracks 0 Image file system 1 (ERDH/Temporary storage) 12GB
10
20
25
30
35
40
45
System storage data Printer spooler General-purpose file General-purpose file
1GB 2GB system 1 system 2
50 1GB 1GB
General-purpose file system 3
55 2GB
Unassigned area
60
65
General-purpose file system 4 General-purpose file system 5
70 2GB 5GB
Inner
tracks 75
㪰㪜㪪
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷 㪥㪦
㪟㪛㪛㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷
㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪈㪀㪖
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷
㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷 㪥㪦
㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㫊㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪉㪀㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪰㪜㪪
㪈 㪉 㪊
㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪈㩷㩽㩷㪉㪕 㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪊㪕
㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷 㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫂㪼㪼㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㪹㫌㫋㩷
㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷 㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷
㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪅 㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪺㪸㫅㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㪃㩹㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤
㩷㩷㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋
㪈 㩷㩷㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪊㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼
㩷㩷㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪁㩷㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㩷㪸㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㪃㩷㪹㫃㪸㫅㫂㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪼㫏㫇㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪜㪯㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫋㫆㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㪉 㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪊㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪉㪄㪇㪈㪅㩷㩿㪝㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㫃㪃㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㪅㪀
㪋㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪠㪤㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤
㩷㩷㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪉㪄㪇㪈㪅㩷㩿㪝㫆㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㩷㫄㫆㪻㪼㫃㪃㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㪅㪀
㪊㪅㩷㪫㫌㫉㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅
㪋㪅㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪊 㪘㫋㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㫋㫀㫄㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㪝㪍㪄㪉㪈㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㪅㩷㪮㪿㪼㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㫀㫋㩷㫄㪸㫐㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㩷㫆㫉㩷㫅㫆㫋㪃㩷㪾㫆㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㫇㫉㫆㪺㪼㪻㫌㫉㪼㩷㪈㪅
㩿㪈㪀㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫉㫆㫇㫉㫀㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪺㫆㪻㪼㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪍㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫆㪽㫋㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪼㫊㩷㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㪝㪘㪯㪀㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪤㪸㫂㪼㩷㫊㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㪸㫏㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪉㪀㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪎㪄㪎㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪪㪛㪩㪘㪤㪅
㩿㪊㪀㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪼㫅㫍㫀㫉㫆㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩹㩷㪸㫋㩷㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㫀㫋㫀㪸㫃㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩹㩷㫆㫇㪼㫅㩷㩹㩷㩷㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩹㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪃㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㪋㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪘㪙㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㫀㫅㪺㪿㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷㪠㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㫐㩷㫊㫋㫆㫉㪸㪾㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㪀㩷㫆㫉㩷㪻㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪺㫃㫆㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㪀㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪽㪸㫀㫃㫌㫉㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㪸㫊㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be
generated.
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.
In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
must be replaced.
1. ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen ',5!:0
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
3. Counter list
SIM
Display item Descriptions Count-up
Setting Display Clear
condition setting
MAINTENANCE COUNTER Maintenance preset counter (Total) 21-01 –
(TOTAL)
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black and white 22-01 –
TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black and white 22-01 – 26-5
COPY(BW) Black and white copy counter 22-01 24-06
PRINT(BW) Black and white print counter 22-01 24-09
DOC FIL(BW) Black and white document filing print counter 22-01 –
OTHER(BW) Black and white other counter 22-01 24-09
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) 22-01 24-04 26-5
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 22-01 24-04
FUSER WEB UNIT Fusing web print counter 22-01 24-04
FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fusing web unit 22-01 24-04
DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations K (%) 22-01 –
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations K (%) 22-01 –
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 22-02 24-01
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter 22-02 24-01
TROUBLE Trouble counter 22-02 24-01
SPF Document feed quantity 22-08 24-03
SCAN Number of times of scan 22-08 24-03
STAPLER Staple counter 22-08 24-03
PUNCHER Puncher counter 22-08 24-03
STAMP Stamp counter 22-08 24-03
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter 22-08 24-03
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter 22-08 24-03
COVER Cover open/close counter 22-08 24-03
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection 22-08 24-03
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section (* hour * minutes) 22-08 24-03
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section (* hour * minutes) 22-08 24-03
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 22-09 24-02
E. Device Cloning
D. Font/Form Download
(1) Export
1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro
3) Reboot the machine.
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file in the HDD is deleted.
(1) Export Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
1) Select the folder to be backed up. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
set in advance.)
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu. (Example of use)
2) Click "Execute" button. The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
name: *****.bin)
mode for servicing work.
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
I. Job Log
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button. (1) Save Job Log
The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.
G. User Control
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
J. Update of Firmware
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
[11] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-M503N (6) EngineManual
Service resolution
MX-M363/M453/M503 U,
MX-M283/M363/M453/M503
1. Basic specifications N
MX-M282/M362/M452/M502
N
A. Base engine Resolution Writing Writing
Copy: 1200 x 1200dpi Copy: 600 x 600dpi
(1) Type 600 x 600dpi *1
Print: 600 x 600dpi
Type Desktop 1200 x 1200dpi
Gradation Writing Writing
(2) Engine composition Monochrome Monochrome
Copy: 1200 x 1200dpi *2 1bit Copy: 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit
Photo-conductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: 30mm) 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit *1 Print: 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) Print: 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development 1200 x 1200dpi *2 1bit
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Transfer roller *1: Default resolution (Copy)
Cleaning system Counter blade • Printed photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph: 1200dpi
Fusing system Heat roller • Automatic, Text, Text/Printed photo, Map: 600dpi
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle
*2: Equivalent to 256 gradation
system
(7) Printable area
(3) Dimension / Weight
A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 279 x 432mm
1 Outer dimension (W x D x H) MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N: A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 37-33/64 inch B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
(645 x 695 x 953 mm)
A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
MX-M363/M453/M503 U:
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
25-25/64 x 26-3/8 x 37-33/64 inch
(645 x 670 x 953 mm) A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N: Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm
• RSPF system: 8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 37-33/64 inch 16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
(645 x 695 x 953 mm)
• OC sysem: * The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the A3/
25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 32-25/32 inch 11" x 17" page dimension (297 x 450mm) by PCL/PS driver.
(645 x 695 x 833 mm)
Machine dimension with the N model: Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
bypass tray extended 38-13/16 x 27-23/64 inch (986 x 695 mm) Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
(W x D). U model: Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
38-13/16 x 26-3/8 inch (986 x 670 mm) 8mm or less
Weight Main unit Approx. 209 lbs (95 kg) FR total: 4mm2mm or less
(including
photoreceptor) (8) Engine speed (ppm)
(not including a. In case of tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
consumables)
28 36 45 50
(4) Warm-up Paper
Paper size CPM CPM CPM CPM
type
model model model model
Warm-up time 20 seconds or less
Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 15 17 20 22
Pre-heat Yes paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 17 20 23 25
8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
(5) First copy time
8.5" x 13.5"
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 20 25 30 30
28 CPM 36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
Engine B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
model N model U model N model U model
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22
Platen 4.6 second 3.9 second
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 28 36 45 50
RSPF 10.1 – 10.1 – 9.3
second second second Extra, User-Extra: 14 16 19 21
Paper width 150mm or less
DSPF – 9.5 – 8.8 –
second second Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width over 150mm
* Measuring conditions: A4 (8.5" x 11") Heavy A3, 11" x 17", 8K 11 11 15 15
paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 14 14 17 17
8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
8.5" x 13.5"
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 17 17 21 21
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 28 30 35 35
Extra, User-Extra: 11 11 14 14
Paper width 150mm or less
Extra, User-Extra:
Paper width over 150mm
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 1
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 2
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 3
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (19pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600dpi)) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
documents
Un-acceptable originals OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
for feeding. document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(Platen/DSPF/RSPF) Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
DSPF/ AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11"
RSPF AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11"
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11"
* 5.5" x 8.5"R, A5R cannot be detected.
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding
Finish stamp Option
Power source Provided from main unit
Dimensions W23-13/16 x D20-5/64 x H6-3/32 inch (W605 x D510 x H155 mm)
Type Standard: Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17",
feed tray 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13",
Full option: 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11" R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, 8K,
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper 16K, 16KR
feed + LCC Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit) letter head, punched paper, colored paper,
heavy paper
(2) Tray 1, 2 (Main unit) Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Heavy paper:
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", Paper size setting when Maximum position of paper guide width
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, shipping
5.5" x 8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, detection
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, Power consumption 20W (Power is supplied from main unit)
heavy paper
Dimensions with 28-22/64 x 11-15/16 inch,
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) (W x D x H) adjuster 720 x 670 x 303 mm
Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index
without 24-13/64 x 26-3/8 x 11-15/16 inch,
(106 - 209g/m2)
adjuster 615 x 670 x 303 mm
Paper size setting when AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3
shipping Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5" x 11", Tray 2: 11" x 17" (5) Tray 5 (LCC)
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
detection Type 3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
Transport speed 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s
(3) Manual paper feed tray (main unit)
Paper size A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Paper size setting Simulation setup
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
envelope/OHP: 20 sheets Paper size setting when A4
shipping
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", Paper type setting Yes
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, Allowable paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, envelope, 8K, and weight for paper letter head, punched paper, colored paper:
16K, 16KR feed 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, Paper capacity 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, Effective height: 385 mm
heavy paper, thin paper, envelope, OHP, Paper remaining Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
label sheet, tab paper detection
Feedable Paper Weight Thin paper: Driving form The transport motor (DC brush-less motor)
15 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) and control PWB are built-in to LCC.
Plain paper: Off-center adjustment 3mm
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) (Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment)
Heavy paper: Power consumption Normal operation : 26.4W
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) (without heater) During lift-up : 40.8W
Power source 5V5% and 24V5% are supplied from main
unit
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 4
External dimensions 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 x 20-15/32 inch, G. Copy functions
(W x D x H) 370 x 550 x 520 mm
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Dimensions occupied by 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 inch, 370 x 550 (mm)
Machine (W x D) * Clearance with main unit: 235 mm
Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio 1: 1 0.8%
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs, 30 kg
AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
Thermal heater Standard equipment: AC power is supplied
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
from main unit. And main unit can control ON/
200%, 400%
OFF operation.
Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
Optional detection Auto detection system
121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
F. Paper exit section Zoom 25-400% (DSPF/RSPF: 25-200%)
Preset magnification 4 (Reduction 2/Enlargement 2)
(1) Center tray of main unit ratio
XY zoom Yes
Paper exit section Center section of the Right side paper exit
main unit section of the main (2) Density/copy image quality process
unit
Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Map
Paper exit capacity 400 sheets 100 sheets (600 dpi)
(When A4, 8.5" x 11") (When A4, 8.5" x 11") Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph
Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper: (1200 dpi)
weight 15 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) * U model: 600 dpi only
Plain paper: Number of manual steps 9 steps
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Toner save mode Yes
Heavy paper: * Available for Automatic (AE), Text/Printed
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) Photo
Envelope:
20 - 24 lb bond (75 - 90g/m2) (3) Duplex
Shifter function Yes No
Paper exit detection No System Non stack system
Paper exit full detection Yes Paper size 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356),
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343),
(2) Shifter 8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340), 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330),
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, A3, B4,
Paper weight 15 lb bond - 110 lb index (56 - 209g/m2) A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Paper size/type Non-offset Size: Type and weight of Plain paper:
mode A3W and 12" x 18" are not paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
acceptable passed Heavy paper:
Type: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209 g/m2)
Glossy paper are not acceptable Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
Offset Size: letter head, printed paper, punched paper,
mode A3W, 12" x 18", envelope and heavy paper
are not acceptable
Type: (4) Copy functions
Envelope, OHP, label paper,
tab paper and glossy paper are Functions N model U model
not acceptable Automatic paper selection Yes
Offset width 30 mm Automatic magnification ratio selection Yes
Integrity Non-offset Getting out: Paper type selection Yes
* In using the mode It doesn't fall down from tray Paper type setting Yes
recommended paper, Offset Getting out: within 50 mm Auto tray switching Yes
A4/8.5" x 11" mode FR shift: within 10 mm Rotation copy Yes
JOB distance: 10 mm or more Large rotated copy over A4 width Yes
Electronic sort Yes
(3) Paper exit tray
Rotation sort No
Job reservation Yes (99)
Type Exit tray unit
Tray installation priority Yes
Paper exit position/ Paper exit to external in the right side of the
system main unit/Paper exits in face-down Program call / registration Yes (48) Yes (48)*1/(10)
Paper exit capacity 100 sheets (When A4/8.5" x 11") Program name registration Yes
Paper exit paper size/ All of allowable paper for paper feed except Document paper size input Yes
type envelope, tab paper and gloss paper. Document paper size registration Yes
Shifter function No Indeterminate paper size input Yes
Paper exit paper full Yes Indeterminate paper size registration Yes
detection 2-sided copy direction switch Yes
Preview function Yes
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 5
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 6
1 : '10/Jun/01
Scanner • Scan to e-mail *1: Only when the HDD (MX-PB11) is installed.
• Scan to Desktop
(4) Item number of registration items
• Scan to FTP
• Scan to Folder (SMB)
Item No. of registration items
• Scan to USB memory
• Scan to e-mail with Meta*1 One-touch/Group 1000*1 / 500*2 items
• Scan to Desktop with Meta*1 Max. number of registration items for one
• Scan to FTP with Meta*1 group (500*1 / 300*2 items)
• Scan to SMB with Meta*1 Program 48*1 / 8*2 items
• Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter /
(Document Admin) relay and broadcast: 100*1 / 30*2 items
Fax • Fax to Fax (Manual) (Fax)
• Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax*1/Fax (Relay transfer) Sender registration Fax, Internet Fax*1: 1 item
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing)*1 User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000*1 / 200*2 items
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin) Transfer table list Fax, Internet Fax*1: 1 item
Internet Fax*1 • Internet Fax to Internet Fax (Manual) Sender selection 18 items
• Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB Item name 30 items
(Inbound routing)*1 File name 30 items
• Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Polling allow number Fax: 10 items
(Document Admin)
*1: For the machine with HDD installed.
*1: For the machine with HDD installed.
*2: For the machine without HDD installed.
(2) Support system
Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1
Corresponding SMTP POP server
server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP) SMTP server
N/A
SMB ESMTP server
HTTP/HTTPS
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 7
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 8
*4: Function to set up a text message that will be added Internet Fax *1
automatically to the message body upon e-mail transmission. Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1
Editing upon transmission is not allowed. Preview Yes (N model only)
*5: For the machine without HDD installed. Edge erase Yes
(Edge/Edge + center/
(7) Specification of multiple addresses center/side)
Original count Yes
Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax Book division No
Direct SMTP *1
Fax destination N/A Yes
Broadcast Yes (e-mail/ Yes
confirmation
FTP/Desktop/
(Preventing
SMB available)
mistarnsmittion)
Number of Broadcast 500*1/300*2
destinations (For FTP/SMB/Desktop, max. 200*1/100*2 items) *1: For the machine with HDD installed.
Request of serial N/A Yes
transmission
(9) Reception function
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 9
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 10
Internet Fax *1 Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1 Direct SMTP *1
Suppress Yes *1 N/A Number of memory N/A 100*3/30*4
background (Only color and boxes (Including
grayscale) bulletin board/
Card shot Yes (Magnification ratio 63-400%) confidential/relay
Transmission N/A Yes N/A broadcast)
confirmation Time-out time Memory box N/A Up to 18
can be set from registration name characters in full
1 minute - 240 and half size
hours by each Reply-To registration 1000*3/ N/A
minute (Direct 200*4
SMTP: No) (user
Forwarding sent Yes registration
and received Forwarding data formats can be selected. (Single TIFF/ from Web)
data (Document Multi TIFF/PDF/XPS) (Scan to e-mail/FTP/SMB/ Number of sender N/A 1 (20 characters) Only one sender
Admin) Desktop/PC-Internet Fax*1/PC-Fax/Fax/Internet Fax*1 registration is registered, and Internet Fax*3/
are also supported) Fax addresses or phone numbers
Folder setting by each of send and receive is are registered in the name part.
supported. (40 characters in half size is
Number of Job 99*1/50*2 available by soft switch setting)
status indication Number of sender N/A N/A Total: 18
selection registration (20 characters)
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. (In addition to
*2: For the machine without HDD installed. default,
18 registrations
*3: Function that enables settings of e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax
available)
addresses as destinations of F-code broadcast.
(40 characters in
(12) Record size half size is
available by soft
Internet Fax *1 switch setting)
Mode Scanner Fax Registration of polling N/A Yes
Direct SMTP *1
Maximum record width N/A 293mm approval number 10 numbers/
Record size N/A A3 - A5/11" x 17" - 5.5" x 8.5" 20 digits
Registration of Fax N/A No
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. system number
(Sharp mode)
(13) Registration-related setting Registration of Fax N/A No
polling approval ID
Internet Fax *1 number (Sharp mode)
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1
Fax relay ID N/A No
One-touch/group *1 1000*3/500*4 destinations LDAP can be used. registration (Sharp
e-mail/ FTP/ Desktop/ mode)
SMB/ Internet Fax
Quick key (short cut Yes
(Direct SMTP)/ Fax
registration) * 2 (0001 - 1000*3 / 0001 - 500*4)
Maximum registration 500*3/300*4 addresses
Retrieving/scanning Yes
number per group dial
of registered data to (By address book conversion utility)
One-touch name 36 characters in full and half size other model
registration
Import/export of Yes
One-touch dial Up to 64 digits including receiver number, address book (By storage backup)
receiver number sub-address and passcode (including “/”).
registration (Fax) *1: Since scan/Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)/Fax uses the
Group name 36 characters in full and half size common address book, the number of addresses allowed for
registration registration is the sum total of all modes.
Address book No
*2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registration from
registered number of each address within the book for address
Resend screen
selection. Users can select a quick key number.
Default address setup Yes N/A
Desktop registration Yes N/A *3: For the machine with HDD installed.
(Registration by using *4: For the machine without HDD installed.
Web or NST (network
scanner tool))
SMB destination Yes N/A
registration (Can be
registered on the
Web.)
FTP destination Yes N/A
registration (Can be
registered on the
Web.)
Program Addresses 48*3/8*4
(One-touch, groups),
settings (density,
image quality,
resolution, original
setting) and special
functions can be
registered in one set.
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 11
1 : '10/Jun/01
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 12
K. Document filing function/Print hold function (*1): Sharp Standard Chart/ binary monochrome
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 13
(3) Data operation contents
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is disabled.
*1: N model only
(4) Reprint / resend limitation items for each job
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 14
User’s selection section
Resend
Selected color mode
Mode Job kind
N model U model + MX-PB11 U model N model U model + MX-PB11 U model
Printer Printer No selection available N/A
Copy Copy No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Image Scan send Full color Binary B/W N/A Yes: Full color/ Yes N/A
send Binary B/W
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Binary B/W Yes:
Binary B/W
Internet Fax send No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Fax send No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Document Scan to HDD Full color Binary B/W N/A Yes: Full color/ Yes N/A
filing (Send allowed mode) Binary B/W
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Binary B/W Yes
(Send allowed mode)
Binary B/W No No
(High capacity mode)
L. Ambient conditions
(1) Working environment
(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
10 30 35
(Temperature)
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 – 15
1
(1)
DSPF UNIT RSPF UNIT
<MX-M363N/M453N/M503N> SCOV SPPD1 SPED SPLS1 <MX-M283N/
MX-M503N
OPTION
SRRC SPPD2 SOCD SPLS2 MX-M363U/M453U/M503U/
STMPS SPLS1 SPPD1 SCOV
MX-M363F/M423F/M503F>
1 : '10/Jun/01
5%#00'4 70+6
%%& 29$
#7&+614
MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N
5%0
&'4+8'4; 70+6 29$ 20%
&59A( 126+10
21& 21(/ 21/ 126+10 .'& 29$
126+10 /+/
&59A4 20% /16*'4
21& 21(/ #&7/* %1+0 8'0&14 2%7 29$ .'& &4+8'4
21(/ 29$ 145A.'&
6(& 15/ 60( 29$
12'4#6+10 70+6
617%*
2#0'.
#&7/. 1<(/
(75'4 70+6 9'$'0& &4+8'4
.8&5 .%&
2(/ 29$ &/ %47/ 29$
6*A7/
44/ 2525 126+10
6*A75 *.A7/ 12' 29$
(+0 -
*. 145A2&
*.A75 QT 29$
29$
5(+0 219'4 59
*.A79 29$
6**7&&8 QT
25 70+6 75$ +(
(+0 +00'4
4+)*6 &114 70+6 22& 6%5
4&%(/ .%%
126+10 22& *87 &* .57 %06 .& 29$
21& 2%5 75$ *156
29$
(Color) CIS unit DSPF Driver PWB Touch Panel Touch Panel Touch Panel
Motor
White LED Sensor Motor
8.5 inch 7.0 inch
8.1 inch
CIS Motor Color WVGA Color WVGA
B/W HVGA
Driver SOL (MX-M283/M363/ (MX-M282/M362/
(U/F model)
AFE AFE Motor M453/M503 N) M452/M502 N)
Driver
LSI Sensor
LVDS PWB KEY PWB
DSPF control PWB Receiver
KEY Buzzer LED
Receiver CPU
(H8S) USB Host
Program SRAM Front Access
Flash ROM Flash DIMM
SCAN ASIC Work
SDRAM (Shading) Key Board Option Power SW PWB
(Medusa) Sensor
(MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N)
Mirror
Motor
(MX-M363/M453/M503 N)
AFE AFE
SDRAM
IPD/DOCC ASIC
Receiver
Transmitter
Mother PWB
SCAN I/F
OPE unit
Transmitter
Program / Option
Flash DIMM
G Ethernet G Ether
PHY IC Data memory/
On board Flash memory
(U/F model only)
SoC MPC8377E
PIC
RIC I/F ACRE I/F
D-SUB 9pin
PCI-e (Option (N model only))
ImageArea
LSU I/F
PCI Uranos
USB device
2.0 Hi-Speed SCAN I/F
Kronos2 ASIC
Local Memory
Kronos2 Local Memory DDR2 144pin SO-DIMM x
On Board SDRAM SATA CN
1Solt
FAX I/F
HDD unit
(N/F model: Standard) FAX unit
(U model: Option) (F model)
LD PWB
LSU ASIC
(Raccon)
D. Engine
Mother PWB
Engine Block
PCU PWB
LSU ASIC
IO ASIC
(Raccon)
DC Motor
Sensor
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C.
TxD1
P.U. P.U.
RxD
SCN Cnt
TRANS_DAT P.U. TxD[0]
RxD
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD Schmit Inv. O.C.
RSV_DAT LSU ASIC P.U.
TxD RxD[0]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
P.U. P.U. CPU P.D.
SCK1 SCK O.C Schmit Inv.
SCK_LSU H8S/2373 P.U.
RTS[0]
RTS_SCN
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. A[4:0]
E. Serial communication
TxD
RxD
TxD_FIN P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
RXD_DSPF
SoC MPC8377E
TXD_DSPF
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.D.
P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP P.U.
O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN
nTxD_PIC
O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER P.U. P.U.
RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN
nRxD_PIC
O.C. O.C.
(Optional) PIC
O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD I/O port
P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD I/O port
P.D.
P.D.
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C.
(Optional) H8S/2373
ASIC P.U.
RTS[1]
RTS_FAX2 (D)
TxD Schmit Inv. Inv.
P.U. O.C. CTS[1]
CPU
PIC CTS_FAX2 (D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Inv. Inv.
RxD RTS[3]
RTS_FAX2 (CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. Inv.
CTS[3]
CTS_FAX2 (CS)
P.D. O.C Inv. Inv.
MX-FXX2/2nd FAX for F-model
LIU PWB
F. FAX (Option: MX-FXX2)
RGDT-(CI detection)
+
F101
~
~
12A/125V
-
N/F
AC PWB
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
15A/250V F102
A3 VR2 T1AH/250V
N
FW Voltage
Z101
G. AC power line diagram (100V)
L1
no-mounting RY1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
INT24V1
L2
HL PWB
HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY2 SCN
NC
WHPR NO TD2
TD1 TD3
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
DESK
10W drawer
DESK
HL UW HL US
THERMOSTAT TS_US
LCC
10W
LCC HL UM
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
FUSING UNIT
Reactor DC POWER SUPPLY
10mH
3A F301
Voltage
Conversion
T3.15AH/250V
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
D101
+
F101
~
~
T6.3AH/250V
-
N/F
AC PWB
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
T10A/250V F102
A3 VR2 T3.15AH/250V
F2
N
T10A/250V FW Voltage
H. AC power line diagram (200V)
L1
RY1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
INT24V1
L2
HL PWB
HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WHPR NO TD1 TD2 TD3
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
DESK
10W drawer
DESK
HL UW HL US
THERMOSTAT TS_US
LCC
10W
LCC HL UM
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
FUSING UNIT
PSU MFPC PWB FAX1(OP)
FAX2(OP) GND1
Mother PWB GND1 GND1 GND1 GND2
GND2 GND2 GND2 5VO
5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VL PIC LSU CNT PWB
SUB 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V PIC 3.3V GND2
24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 BD
5VL Internal FAX (F model) 5VN
MX-FXX2/FLX2 GND1
1 : '10/Jun/01
1
GND2 1.5V GND1
3.3V 2.5V 1.8V 1.2V 1.0V
DCCNT2 24V3 24V3 PGM
GND1 RSPF unit
GND2 5VLD 5VLD 24V3
MAIN DCCNT1 5VO LD For U model Stamp(OP)
F203 5VL GND2 MX-RP11 (option)
3.3V
24V3 24V3 24V3
5VN 5VN
6.3A/250V
GND1 Motor
+5V_HDD FET GND2
GND2 5VN Solenoid
HDD 12V
24V3 24V3 Cluch
I. DC power line diagram
3.3V
GND2 GND2 24V3 CCD RSPF Driver PWB
GND1 GND1 5VLD 5VN 5VN
A3.3V 3.3V GND2 Sensor
GND2
5VO
GND2 GND2 SCNcnt PWB
12V 12V 12V 12V A5V
24V3 24V3 A5V
5VN 5VN GND2 DSPF unit
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V For MX-M363/M453/M503 N
5VO 5VO A10V
A10V
12V 12V DSPFcnt PWB
1
5VLD
GND2
(N model)
GND1 GND1
HVU
GND1 INT24V2
INT24V2 24V3 LAMP DSPF Driver
GND2 (U model) Motor
F202 24V3 PWB
RY1 Driver PWB Solenoid
24V2 24V2 INT24V2 PFM RRM ADUMH ADUML POM 24V3
INT24V2 10V Cluch
6.3A/250V INT24V1 FET A3.3V
GND2 A3.3V GND2
GND1 12V Fan Motor
GND2 (POFM3)
AC PWB 5VN 7V 24V3
3.3V 5VN 5VN
Stamp(OP)
GND2 Sensor
(TH/HUS-DV) 1.2V
5VLD
GND2
F201 GND2 24V3 ORS LED
PCU PWB 24V1B TCS,Solenoid 1.5V PWB 5VN
24V1B 24V1B Cluch,LUM,COUNTER(OP) GND2 Sensor
3.3V 1.5V
6.3A/250V 24V1A 24V1A 24V1A
GND2
DSW-R Fan Motor 5VO
12V
A7V
5VN
Reg
(POFM1/2,PSFM1/2
GND2 OZFM,LSUCFM) 24V3
SCM
Reg CIS
OSM(Stepping Motor)
DSW-F 5VN
FET
WEBM(Synchronous)
GND2 Sensor
INT24V1 INT24V1 OPE
LVDS-PWB GND2
24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 INVERTER
5VN 5VN 5VN
DM FUM CPFM GND2 GND2 GND2
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V
GND2 GND2 LCD
12V 12V
OR OR
INNER
Punch DESK 2
FINISHER
OPTION
1
AC PWB MOTHER PWB
DC PWB
CN6 PAP-03V-S
<100V series> (AC CORD) VLP-03V DCCNT1 1 PHR-3 CN14
CN1 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 1 GND2
1 L_IN DCCNT2 3 2 nDCCNT1
(NC) 2 NC CN2 VLP-03V-K B03B-PASK-1 3 nDCCNT2
3 N_IN MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout 1 B3P-PH-K-S
B03P-VL NC 2 (NC) PS-250(RED) CN2 VHR-5N VHR-10N CN10
MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout 1 GND2 1 1 GND2
B03P-VL-K PS-250(RED) GND2 2 2 GND2
1 : '10/Jun/01
2 NC B6P-VH-B
3 L_WH ELR-02V / ELP-02V CN6
B2P3-VH-R 2 L-in 2 3 L-in
Reactor 1 L-out 1 (NC) 2 NC
1 L-out
VHR-3N-BL B2P3-VH-B CN5 VHR-4N
12V 1 PCU PWB
12V 2
WH-SW GND2 3 (NC) CN4 CN8 PHDR-10VS-2 PSFM1
GND2 4 XLP-12V (Power supply section) (AC section/Power fan) SMR-03V-N / SMP-03V-NC
PS-187(WH) B4P-VH-B (NC) 12 NC PSFM1_V 1 1 PSFM1_V 1
L_WH 1 11 3.3V PSFM1_LD 3 2 PSFM1_LD 2
PS-187(WH) CN7 VHR-8N 9 5VN GND2 5 3 GND2 3
L_WH 1 FW 1 10 GND2 PSFM2_V 2 1 PSFM2_V 1
GND1 2 8 GND2 PSFM2_LD 4 3 PSFM2_LD 3
GND1 3 (NC) 7 12V GND2 6 2 GND2 2
GND1 4 (NC) 6 FW (in) GND2 7 (NC) SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
GND1 5 (NC) 5 FW(out) /INT_CNT 8 PSFM2
GND1 6 2 GND2 INT24V1 9
GND1 7 P9 (NC) 3 nc GND2 10
JPN:STANDARD GND1 8 P9 4 24V1B B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
P3 24V1A(Interlock)
EX100V:OPTION B8P-VH-B 1
EX120V:OPTION B12P-XL(LF)(SN)
EX200V:OPTION CN8 VHR-7N
WH PWB 24V1-b 1
CN1 CN5 24V1-a 2
1 WH-L WHPR 1 24V2 3
2 NC (NC) 2 (NC) 24V3 4
3 WH-N 24V1B 3 24V3 5 (NC)
B2P3-VH-R B03B-PH-K-R PHR-3-R 24V4 6 P9
VHR-3N-R 24V5 7 P9
B7P-VH-B
CN4
WH_N(LCC) 1
WH_N(DESK) 2
(NC) 3 (NC) P9
WH_L(DESK) 4
WH_L(LCC) 5
B4P(5-3)-VH
VHR-5N
SCANNER UNIT
AC PWB
VHR-4N CN7 CN9
1 24V2 GND2 2
(NC) 2 NC INT24V1 3
3 INT24V2 /INT CNT 1
MOTOR DRIVER PWB 4 INT24V2 B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) PHR-3
B4P-VH-B(LF)
CN5 VHR-3N-R SLR-06VF / SLP-06V SLR-02VF / SLP-02V
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1
GND1 2 2 GND1 2 2 GND1 2
+5VN 3 3 LSUCFM_LD 3
B3P-VH-R 4 LSUCFM_V 4
P4 P4
5 GND2 5
6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6
PCU PWB
CN13
5VN 2
B7P-VH(LF)(SN)
THERMOSTAT(MAIN)
1 : '10/Jun/01
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
5V_TNBOX 3 4 5V_TNBOX 4 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
(Power)
N-HL(MAIN)
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5
4 L-HL(MAIN) 4 GND2 2 6 GND2 6
3
2
1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
6 N-HL(UW) 6 VHPGP1S73P+-18 7 /C_CARD 7
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 8 /C_SEL 8
4
5
6
B1
B5
B6
B7
B9
2 N-HL(SUB) 2 9 /C_CLOCK 9
5 L-HL(SUB) 5 10 /C_DATA 10
3 N-HL(EXT) 3 11 5VN 11
12 GND2 12
(NC)
(NC)
(Connector) SCN-CNT PWB
GND2
GND2
GND2
SMR-06V-N / SMP-06V-NC
N-HL(UW)
B2 WEB-END
B8 TH_US_IN
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
B3 TH_MY_IN(200)
B4 TH_MY_IN(100)
B-9 GND2 B-1 1 /C_CARD 1
B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 2 /C_SEL 2 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N PHR-7 CN3
B-7 (NC) B-3 CARD READER 3 /C_CLOCK 3 1 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD
B-6 (NC) B-4 (OPTION) 4 /C_DATA 4 2 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL
B-5 GND2 B-5 5 5VN 5 3 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK
Main frame side B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 6 GND2 6 4 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 5 5VN 5 5 5VN
B-2 WEB-END B-8 6 GND2 6 6 GND2
B-1 GND2 B-9 (NC) 7 (NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
A-10 (NC) A-1 B7B-PH-K-S
A-9 (NC) A-2
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
A-8 (NC) A-3 CN13
A-7 (NC) A-4 (Interlock/Driver PWB)
1
2
3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
A-6 (NC) A-5 (NC) 1 GND2
A-5 (NC) A-6 PS-187 P1 2 5VN
6
5
4
B1
B3
B4
B5
B9
A-4 (NC) A-7 DSW-F ELP-02V / ELR-02V ELP-02V / ELR-02V (NC) 3 GND2
A-3 (NC) A-8 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 4 DSW_Fin
A-2 (NC) A-9 2 DSW_Rout 2 2 DSW_Rout 2 5 DSW_Rout
(NC)
(NC)
GND2
GND2
GND2
A-1 (NC) A-10 DSW_Rout 2 6 DSW_Rin
B. Front section, Fuser unit section (MX-M283 N, MX-M363 N/U, MX-M453 N/U, MX-M503 N/U) (P2A)
7 24V1A(Interlock)
B8 WEB-END
B2 TH_US_IN
N-HL(UW)
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
B6 TH_MY_IN(100)
B7 TH_MY_IN(200)
SPS-01T-187 PS-187-2V VHR-7N B7P-VH-B(LF)(SN)
DSW-R
DSW_Rin 1
24V1A(Interlock) 2
1
THERMOSTAT(MAIN)
1 : '10/Jun/01
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
4 L-HL(MAIN) 4 GND2 2 6 GND2 6
6 N-HL(UW) 6 VHPGP1S73P+-18
3
2
1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
4
5
6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
5 L-HL(SUB) 5
3 N-HL(EXT) 3 CN13
(Interlock/Driver PWB)
(Connector)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC) 1 GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
N-HL(UW)
L-HL(SUB)
WEB-END
L-HL(MAIN)
TH_MY_IN(200)
TH_MY_IN(100)
TH_US_IN
B-9 GND2 B-1 PS-187 P1 2 5VN
B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 DSW-F ELP-02V / ELR-02V ELP-02V / ELR-02V (NC) 3 GND2
B-7 (NC) B-3 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 4 DSW_Fin
B-6 (NC) B-4 2 DSW_Rout 2 2 DSW_Rout 2 5 DSW_Rout
B-5 GND2 B-5 DSW_Rout 2 6 DSW_Rin
Main frame side B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 QSW-M0502FCPZ 7 24V1A(㨼㩧㩊㨺㩥㨹㩂㧕
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 SPS-01T-187 PS-187-2V VHR-7N B7P-VH-B(LF)(SN)
B-2 WEB-END B-8 DSW-R
B-1 GND2 B-9 DSW_Rin 1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
A-10 (NC) A-1 24V1A(Interlock) 2
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
A-9 (NC) A-2 QSW-M0502FCPZ
A-8 (NC) A-3
1
2
3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
A-7 (NC) A-4
A-6 (NC) A-5
6
5
4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
A-5 (NC) A-6
A-4 (NC) A-7
A-3 (NC) A-8
(NC)
(NC)
A-2 (NC) A-9
GND2
GND2
GND2
WEB-END
L-HL(MAIN)
TH_MY_IN(100)
TH_MY_IN(200)
TH_US_IN
L-HL(SUB)
N-HL(UW)
A-1 (NC) A-10
179228-3
PPD2
PS UNIT 5VN 1 Main frame
PPD2 2
GND2 3
SMR-07V-N / SMP-07V-NC
5 5VN 5
179228-3 6 PPD2 6
PPD1 7 GND2 7
HV RESISTOR FG 5VN 1 1 5VN 1
SRA-21T-4 PPD1 2 2 PPD1 2
PWB GND2 3 3 GND2 3 PCU PWB
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) PHDR-26VS-1
P1
17 /WHPR
(NC) 16 GND2
(NC) 14 GND2
(NC) 12 GND2
PHDR-32VS-1 (NC) 10 24V1B
CN3 (NC) 9 GND2
(NC) 1 NC(FAX_D) PHDR-18VS-2 B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
179228-3 (NC) 2 NC(GND2)
APPD2 (NC) 3 NC(5VLED6)
APPD2 1 4 APPD2
GND2 2 5 GND2
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
(NC) 11 NC(GND2) 1 24V1B 1
(NC) 13 NC(PSD) 2 /MPUC 2
MPUC
(NC) 28 NC(5VN)
(NC) 29 NC(HUD_M)
(NC) 30 NC(GND2) SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
(NC) 31 NC(TH_M) 1 24V1B 1
(NC) 32 NC 2 /ADUGS 2
ADUGS
(NC) 15 NC(5VLED8)
16 MPLD
(NC) 17 NC(GND2)
18 5VLED12
19 5VN SMR-07V-N/SMP-07V-NC SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
20 MPWD 1 RDCFM_LD 1 3 RDCFM_LD 3
Manual feed tray unit (NC) 21 NC(GND2) PHDR-32VS-1 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 RDCFM
22 MTOP2 CN3 3 RDCFM_V 3 1 RDCFM_V 1
(NC) 23 NC(GND2) MPED 7 4 PCS_LED 4
24 5VLED13 GND2 8 5 PCS 5
(NC)
2 GND2 4 2 GND2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 5VLED11 5 3 5VLED11
1
3
5
2
4
6
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND2
GND2
GND2
24V1B
24V1B
24V1B
1
3
5
2
4
6
DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DP-SP1(05) DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DS-SP2(05)
CS1 PAPER FEED UNIT
179228-3
CLUD1 PHNR-14-H / BU14P-TR-P-H / PHNR-14-H
GND2 3 14 GND2 1
CLUD1 2 13 CLUD1 2
5VN 1 12 5VN 3
11 GND2 4
10 CPED1 5
9 5VN 6
179228-3 8 GND2 7
CPED1 7 CPFD1 8
GND2 3 6 5VN 9
CPED1 2 5 GND2 10
5VN 1 4 DSW_C 11
3 5VN 12
2 /CPFC2 13
1 24V1B 14 Main frame
179228-3
CPFD1
GND2 3 179228-3 PCU PWB
CPFD1 2 CSPD1
5VN 1 GND2 3
CSPD1 2 DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-24DES-2.5RC PHDR-30VS-1 CN5 (Paper feed section sensor)
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
179228-3 5 CPFD1 5 3 CPFD1
DSW_C 179228-3 20 CPFD2 20 4 CPFD2
GND2 3 CSPD2 3 CLUD1 3 5 CLUD1
DSW_C 2 GND2 3 18 CLUD2 18 6 CLUD2
5VN 1 CSPD2 2 4 CPED1 4 7 CPED1
5VN 1 19 CPED2 19 8 CPED2
8 CSPD1 8 9 CSPD1
17 CSPD2 17 10 CSPD2
PHR-6
E. Paper feed unit section (P4)
6 DSW_C 6 11 DSW_C
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC CSS1 7 /CPFC2 7 (NC) 12 GND2
1 /CPFC2 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 21 24V1B 21 (NC) 13 CSS1
CPFC2 2 24V1B 2 GND2 2 (NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) (NC) 14 CSS2
CSS11 3 9 CSS11 9 15 CSS11
CSS12 4 13 CSS21 13 16 CSS21
CSS13 5 10 CSS12 10 17 CSS12
CSS14 6 14 CSS22 14 18 CSS22
11 CSS13 11 19 CSS13
15 CSS23 15 20 CSS23
PHR-6 12 CSS14 12 21 CSS14
CSS2 16 CSS24 16 22 CSS24
(NC) 1 (NC) 23 5VN 23 23 5VN
GND2 2 24 GND2 24 24 GND2
CSS21 3 (NC) 25 GND2
CSS22 4 (NC) 26 GND2
CS2 PAPER FEED UNIT CSS23 5 (NC) 27 5VN reserve2-in
CSS24 6 (NC) 28 reserve2-in
(NC) 29 GND2
(NC) 30 GND2
B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
179228-3
CLUD2 PHNR-09-H / BU09P-TR-P-H / PHNR-09-H
GND2 3 9 GND2 1
CLUD2 2 8 CLUD2 2
5VN 1 7 5VN 3
6 GND2 4
5 CPED2 5
4 5VN 6
179228-3 3 GND2 7
CPED2 2 CPFD2 8
GND2 3 1 5VN 9
CPED2 2
5VN 1
(NC)
(NC)
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHR-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
CPFM
179228-3 INT24V1 1
CPFD2 GND2 2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2 3 FG-OUT 3 (NC)
CPFD2 2 /CPFM_D 5
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
5VN 1 CW/CCW 7 (NC)
/CPFM_CK 4
DF11-8DS-2C DF11-8DS-2C SSJC6-4 CPFM_LD 6
+DF11-8DP-SP1 +DF11-8DP-SP1
PHR-2
CLUM1
/CLUM1 2
GND2 1
PHR-2
CLUM2
/CLUM2 2
GND2 1
Main drive unit Main frame
DV UNIT
PCU PWB
CN2 (TM)
(NC) 1 (nc)
(NC) 2 /TMA
(NC) 3 /TMXA
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC (NC) 4 /TMB
2 24V1B 2 (NC) 5 /TMXB
TDSC 1 /TDSC 1 (NC) 6 24V1B_TM
5 5 (NC) 7 (nc)
1 1 B7B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
6 2 2 6
7 3 3 7
4 4 CN3
8 8 (DV section/high voltage section)
SMP-10V-NC / SMR-10V-N 1 (nc)
51021-0400 1 24V1B 1 2 (nc)
TCS QR/P8-8P-C(01)/QR/P8-8S-C(02) 2 /TDSC 2 3 24V1B
TSGout 1 1 TSGout 1 3 TSGout 3 4 /TDSC
GND2 4 2 GND2 2 4 GND2 4 5 GND2
TCS 3 3 TCS 3 5 TCS 5 6 GND2
24V1B 2 4 24V1B 4 6 24V1B 6 7 TSGout
5 DVCH1 5 7 DVCH1 7 8 GND2
6 DVCH2 6 8 DVCH2 8 9 TCS
7 DVCH3 7 9 DVCH3 9 10 24V1B
8 GND2 8 10 GND2 10 (NC) 11 5VN
12 DVCH1
(NC) 13 GND2
14 DVCH2
(NC) 15 /TNCRU
16 DVCH3
17 GND2
(NC) 18 reserve1-in
(NC) 19 /DVBSREM
20 /HV_CLK
(NC) 21 /DHVREM
22 /HV_DATA
23 /HV_REM#
24 /HV_LD
(NC) 25 GND2
HV PWB 26 MHV-T
B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
PF-187U(RED) RD CN1 PHDR-26VS-1
MHV MHV /HV_CLK# 4
SRA-21T-3 Faston tab #187 /HV_DATA# 3
HV_REM# 7
/HV_LD# 5
VHR-2N-Y YL MHV-T 6
GB 1 GB GND2 2
P1
(NC) 2 (NC) INT24V2 1
SRA-21T-3
B2P-VH-Y B07B-PASK
PAP-07V-S
GR
DVBS 1 DVBS
(NC) 2 (NC)
SRA-21T-3
VHR-2N-M B2P-VH-M
PF-187U(WHITE) WH
THV THV
SRA-21T-3 Faston tab #187
BL
DHV 1 DHV
(NC) 2 (NC)
SRA-21T-3
VHR-2N-BL B2P-VH-BL
PCU PWB
PHR-6-R PHDR-18VS-2
FUM SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC CN12 (HL section drive)
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 3 GND2
/FUMCK 4 3 FUM_CK 3 9 FUM_CK
/FUMD 5 4 /FUM_D 4 7 /FUM_D
FUMLD 6 5 FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
FGOUT 3 (NC) (NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC) (NC) 5 5VN
7 POMA// 7 (NC) 13 GND2
PHR-6 8 POM24V 8 (NC) 15 GND2
POM 9 POMB// 9 MOTOR DRIVER PWB (NC) 17 24V1B
POMA// 1 10 POMA/ 10 PAP-12V-S CN2 B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
POM24V 2 11 POM24V 11 5 POMA//
POMB// 3 12 POMB/ 12 1 POM24V
POMA/ 4 4 POMB//
POM24V 5 6 POMA/
POMB/ 6 2 POM24V
3 POMB/
B12B-PASK-1
FG FG
PAP-13V-S CN3
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 11 ADUMHA//
12 ADUMHA/
9 ADUMHB/
10 ADUMHB//
7 ADUMH24V
8 ADUMH24V
(NC) 13 NC
B13B-PASK-1
PHR-7
DM (Drum motor)
G. Paper delivery unit section (P6)
TSHR-04V-K
179228-3 CRUM SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC
POD1 GND2 4 1 GND2 1
5VN 1 5VN 3 2 5VN 2
POD1 2 CRUM_CLK 2 3 CRUM_CLK 3
GND2 3 CRUM_DATA 1 4 CRUM_DATA 4
5 LSUCFM_V 5
6 LSUCFM_LD 6
P4
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7
(NC)
P4
8 GND2 8
2
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
9 24V1B 9
P2
10 /PNC 10
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
4
5
6
4
2
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
DF11-4DS-2C
+ SSJC6-4 SSJC6-6
DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
SLP-02V / SLR-02VF
1 WEB_M1out 1
WEBM 2 WEB_M2out 2
1 : '10/Jun/01
PHDR-26VS-1 PHDR-30VS-1
CN2 CN2 CN3 CN1 (MOTHER)
GND2 1 GR GR 3 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
+3.3V 3 OR OR 1 +3.3V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND1 2 GR GR 4 GND1 5VLD 3 3 5VLD
+24V3 4 RD RD 2 +24V3 5VLD 4 4 5VLD
+5VN 5 BL BL 5 +5VN GND2 5 5 GND2
GND2 6 GR GR 6 GND2 GND2 6 (NC) (NC) 6 (nc)
S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-06V-1 RXD_PCU 7 7 PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR 8 8 PCU_DSR
TXD_PCU 9 9 PCU_TXD
PCU_DTR 10 10 PCU_DTR
GND2 11 11 GND2
GND2 12 12 GND2
nPOF 13 13 /POF
nPCU_TRG 14 14 nPCU_TRG
nFAX_LED 15 15 /FAX_LED
PCU_RES 16 16 PCU_RES
2BEAM LD PWB PHDR-24VS-2 GND2 17 17 GND2
CN1 PHDR-20VS-2 CN5 JOBEND_INT 19 19 JOBEND_INT
+5VLD 2 BL BL 23 +5V_LD RSV_DAT 21 21 RSV_DAT
GND2 1 GY GY 24 GND2 CN3 PHDR-16VS-2 PHDR-24VS-2 GND2 23 23 GND2
GND2 3 GY GY 18 GND2 +5V_LD 1 22 +5V_LD TRANS_DAT 22 25 TRANS_DAT
nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1 GND2 2 GR GR 11 GND2 LSU_RST 18 26 LSU_RST
GND2 12 GY GY 1 GND2 nSCK_LSU 4 BR BR 12 nSCK_LSU TRANS_RST 24 27 TRANS_RST
nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2 GND2 3 GR GR 10 GND2 SCK 20 28 SCK
DT1- 14 WH WH 14 DT_K1- nTRANS_DAT 5 BR BR 9 nTRANS_DAT GND2 25 29 GND2
DT1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT_K1+ nRSV_DAT 6 PK BR 14 nRSV_DAT GND2 26 30 GND2
GND2 20 SD SD 12 GND2 JOBEND_INT 8 BR PK 13 JOBEND_INT B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 18 GND2
GND2 6 SD SD 2 GND2 LSUASIC_RST 7 8 LSUASIC_RST 20 HUD_DV
DT2- 8 WH WH 8 DT_K2- nTRANS_RST 9 7 nTRANS_RST 22 TH_DV
DT2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT_K2+ VSYNC_K_N 11 BR BR 18 LSU_VSYNC_K_N 24 +3.3V
nLDERR 11 BR BR 11 nLDERR_K VSYNC_K_P 12 PK PK 17 LSU_VSYNC_K_P B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
VREF_K1 9 BR BR 9 VREF_K1 VSYNC_K2_P 13 (NC) (NC) 16 (nc)
VREF_K2 7 BR BR 7 VREF_K2 VSYNC_K2_N 14 (NC) (NC) 20 (nc)
nENB_K 5 BR BR 5 nENB_K GND2 16 19 GND2
LDCHK2 17 BR BR 6 LD_CHK_2 nPCU_TRG 10 15 nPCU_TRG
LDCHK1 18 BR BR 3 LD_CHK_1 GND2 15 (NC) (NC) 21 GND2
LDCHK3 19 BR BR 17 LD_CHK_3 S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) (NC) 23 GND2
GND2 4 (NC) (NC) 4 nLDERR_K2 (NC) 24 GND2
S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B24B-PHDSS-B
BD PWB PHR-4
CN1
GND2 4 GR GR 21 GND2
BD 3 BR BR 19 nBD
GND2 2 GR GR 22 GND2
+5VN 1 BL BL 20 +5VN
H. LSU section, Temperature/humidity sensor section (P7)
S4B-PH-K-S B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CN4 PHDR-22VS-2 PHDR-22VS-2 CN4
CH0_N 1 WH WH 21 LSU_CH0_N
CH0_P 2 PK PK 22 LSU_CH0_P
MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N GND2 3 SD SD 20 GND2
POLYGON MOTOR (1200dpi) GND2 4 SD SD 19 GND2
CN1 PAP-05V-S PHR-5 CN1 CH1_N 5 WH WH 17 LSU_CH1_N
POLYCLK 1 1 nPOLY_CK CH1_P 6 PK PK 18 LSU_CH1_P
/LOCK 2 2 nPOLY_LOCK CH2_N 7 WH WH 15 LSU_CH2_N
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START CH2_P 8 PK PK 16 LSU_CH2_P
GND1 4 4 GND1 GND2 9 SD SD 14 GND2
+24V3 5 5 +24V3 GND2 10 SD SD 13 GND2
BM05B-PASS-TFT B5B-PH-K-S CLCLK_N 11 WH WH 11 LSU_CLK_N
CLCLK_P 12 PK PK 12 LSU_CLK_P
1
PHR-4
TH&HUD SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N
GND2 3 1 GND2 1
HUD_DV 2 2 HUD_DV 2
TH_DV 4 3 TH_DV 3
+3.3V 1 4 +3.3V 4
RDTCH0214FCPZ
SRA-01T-3.2
US 8.5 Inch LCD model:
STANDARD USB CONVERSION KEY PWB
Other than 1
2 PWB FG
US 8.5 Inch LCD model: 3 SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4
OPTION 4 MOTHER PWB
5 USB PWB PHDR-10VS-2
6 CN CN GHR-10V-S CN16 CN13 QR/P4-8S-C(01) / QR/P4-8P-C(01) SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N
7 1 VBUS2 VBUS2 5 10 VBUS2 PWR_CPUFAN 1 7 PWR_CPUFAN 7 1 PWR_CPUFAN 1
8 2 D2- D2- 4 9 D2- PWM_CPUFAN 3 6 PWM_CPUFAN 6 2 PWM_CPUFAN 2
9 3 D2+ D2+ 3 8 D2+ GND1 5 3 GND1 3 3 GND1 3
CPUFM
10 4 GND2 GND2 2 7 GND2 LOCK_CPUFAN 7 2 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 4 LOCK_CPUFAN 4
11 5 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 1 6 SHIELD2 +24V3 9 (NC) 1 +12V 1
12 BM05B-GHS-TBT 5 VBUS3 PWR_HDDFAN 2 (NC) 5 GND2 5
TO KEYBOARD 13 4 D3- PWM_HDDFAN 4 (NC) 4 +5V_HDD 4
14 TO USB I/F 3 D3+ GND1 6 8 GND2 8
15 2 GND2 LOCK_HDDFAN 8
16 1 SHIELD3 +24V3 10 (NC)
17 BM10B-GHS-TBT B10B-PHDSS-B
18 CN12 VHR-4N HDD(SATA)
19 +12V 1
20 GND2 3 SATA POWER
21 CN PAP-06V-S / PALR-06VF PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S +5V_HDD 2 15 +12V
22 VBUS3 BLUE 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1 GND2 4 14 +12V
23 D3- BROWN 2 D3- 2 2 D3- 2 B4P-VH 13 +12V
24 D3+ LIGHTBLUE 3 D3+ 3 3 D3+ 3 12 GND2
25 GND2 GRAY 4 GND2 4 4 GND2 4 11 GND2
26 SHIELD3 GRAY 5 SHIELD3 5 5 SHIELD3 5 CN1 CN18 MFPC PWB 10 GND2
27 Soldering 6 FG 6 LCD_DATA0- 1 1 LCD_DATA0- 9 +5V_HDD
28 LCD_DATA0+ 2 2 LCD_DATA0+ 8 +5V_HDD
LCD_DATA1- 3 3 LCD_DATA1-
FG FG LCD_DATA1+ 4 4 LCD_DATA1+ 7 +5V_HDD
LCD_DATA2- 5 5 LCD_DATA2- 6 GND2
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 LCD_DATA2+ 6 6 LCD_DATA2+ 5 GND2
LCD_CLK 7 7 LCD_CLK 4 GND2
LCD_CLK+ 8 8 LCD_CLK+ (NC) 3 +3.3V
LCD_DATA3- 9 9 LCD_DATA3-
LCD_DATA3+ 10 10
(NC) 2 +3.3V
LCD_DATA3+
nLCD_DISP 11 11 nLCD_DISP SATA 22pin (NC) 1 +3.3V
LCD_REFCLKIN 12 12 LCD_REFCLKIN
SCANDATA3+ 13 13 SCANDATA3+ CN15 SATA SIGNAL
SCANDATA3- 14 14 SCANDATA3- GND2 1 1 GND2
USB HUB PWB SCANCLKOUT+ 15 15 SCANCLKOUT+
16 SCANCLKOUT-
SATA0_TX_P 2 2 SATA_TXP
SCANCLKOUT- 16
CN3 SCANDATA2+ 17 17 SCANDATA2+ SATA0_TX_N 3 3 SATA_TXN
VBUS2 10 SCANDATA2- 18 18 SCANDATA2- GND2 4 4 GND2
D1- 9 SCANDATA1+ 19 19 SCANDATA1+ SATA0_RX_N 5 5 SATA_RXN
D1+ 8 SCANDATA1- 20 20 SCANDATA1- SATA0_RX_P 6 6 SATA_RXP
SCANDATA0+ 21 21 SCANDATA0+
GND2 7 GND2 7 7 GND2
SCANDATA0- 22 22 SCANDATA0-
SHIELD1 6 CH0_N 23 23 CH0_N 6SAT07P-328B-B5
VBUS3 5 CH0_P 24 24 CH0_P SATA 7pin
D2- 4 CH1_N 25 25 CH1_N
D2+ 3 CH1_P 26 26 CH1_P
CH2_N 27 27 CH2_N POWER
GND2 2 28 CH2_P
CN3
CH2_P 28
SHIELD2 1 CLK_N 29 29 CLK_N +5V 1 (NC) 1 +12V
BM10B-GHS-TBT CLK_P 30 30 CLK_P D- 2 USB2.0 (NC) 2 GND2
CN4 GHR-04V-S PHR-11 CN17 CH3_N 31 31 CH3_N D+ 3 (NC) 3 GND2
VBUS 4 1 VBUS CH3_P 32 32 CH3_P GND2 4 (TYPE-A) (NC) 4 +5V
GND2 1 2 GND2 (NC) 33 33 (NC) UAR27-4K5J00
(NC) 34 34 (NC)
I. FAX section, MFP section, HDD section (P8)
CN7 VHR-8N
GND1 7
GND1 8
B8P-VH-B
CN4 VHR-6N
+5VN 3
+5VN 4
B6P-VH-B
LCC OPTION
ELP-12V-/ELR-12V
(NC) 1 NC 1 (NC)
(NC) 2 NC 2 (NC)
ELP-02V/ELR-02V (NC) 3 NC 3 (NC)
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 5 F-GND 5
(NC) 6 NC 6 (NC)
(NC) 7 NC 7 (NC)
(NC) 8 NC 8 (NC) FG
FG (NC) 9 NC 9 (NC) SRA-21T-4
(NC) 10 NC 10 (NC) WH PWB
(NC) 11 NC 11 (NC)
12 WH_N(LCC) 12 VHR-5N
CN4
5 WH_L(LCC)
4 WH_L(DESK)
(NC) 3 NC
2 WH_N(DESK)
1 WH_N(LCC)
B4P(5-3)-VH
CCD PWB SCN-CNT PWB EHR-3
CN1 CN10 CN4 PHR-6 OCSW
GND2 1 41 GND2 +5VN 1 1 +5VN
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 3 39 GND2 /OCSW 3 3 OCSW
RE+ 4 38 RE+ +24V3 4
RE- 5 37 RE- /SIZE_LED1 5
GND2 6 36 GND2 /SIZE_LED2 6 Soldering(LF) ORS LED PWB
RD+ 7 35 RD+ B6B-PH-SM4-TB +24V3
RD- 8 34 RD- /SIZE_LED1
GND2 9 33 GND2 /SIZE_LED2
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ F-GND
CLK- 11 31 CLK- FG
GND2 12 30 GND2 SRA-21T-4
RC+ 13 29 RC+ CN1 PHR-4
RC- 14 28 RC- MIM_A 1
GND2 15 27 GND2 MIM_B 2 MIRROR
RB+ 16 26 RB+ MIM_XA 3
RB- 17 25 RB- MIM_XB 4
MOTOR
GND2 18 24 GND2 B4B-PH-SM4-TB
RA+ 19 23 RA+
RA- 20 22 RA-
GND2 21 21 GND2 CN17 PHR-3 EHR-3 MHPS
A10V 22 20 A10V MHPS 1 3 MHPS
A10V 23 19 A10V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 24 18 GND2 +5VN 3 1 +5VN
A5V 25 17 A5V B3B-PH-K-S
A5V 26 16 A5V
A5V 27 15 A5V
GND2 28 14 GND2
A3.3V 29 13 A3.3V
A3.3V 30 12 A3.3V
A3.3V 31 11 A3.3V
A3.3V 32 10 A3.3V
A3.3V 33 9 A3.3V
A3.3V 34 8 A3.3V
GND2 35 7 GND2 CL INVERTER PWB
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS CN7 CN
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK +24V3 1 1 +24V3 1 CL
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD +24V3 2 2 +24V3 2
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD CL 3 3 CL
MOTHER PWB GND2 41 1 GND2 GND1 4 4 GND1
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF GND1 5 5 GND1
5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
179228-3
CN C PHR-9 SPLS1
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
B09B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
B7B-PH-K-S
PHR-14 PHDR-34VS-1
CN16 XADR-34V/XADRP-34V CN A CN E PHR-6 PHR-6 SPFM
GND2 1 1 GND2 1 1 GND2 SPFMA/ 1 6 SPFMA/
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 +24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
+12V 8 (NC) 3 SPPD1 3 3 SPPD1 SPFMA 3 4 SPFMA
+12V 9 (NC) 4 SPPD2 4 4 SPPD2 SPFMB 4 3 SPFMB
+24V 10 5 +24VPD 5 5 +24VPD +24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
+24V 11 6 +24VPD 6 6 +24VPD SPFMB/ 6 1 SPFMB/
+5V 7 7 +5V 7 7 +5V B6B-PH-K-S
+3.3V 4 8 +3.3V 8 8 +3.3V
+3.3V 5 (NC) 9 SPFMCK 9 9 SPFMCK
GND2 12 (NC) 10 SPFMM1 10 10 SPFMM1 179228-3
+5VO 3 (NC) 11 SPFMM2 11 11 SPFMM2 CN H PHR-12 PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S SPED
+5V 6 (NC) 12 SPFMO1 12 12 SPFMO1 SPED 1 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
GND2 13 13 SPFMO2 13 13 SPFMO2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 14 14 SPMA 14 14 SPMA +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
B14B-PH-K-S 15 SPMA/ 15 15 SPMA/ +5VPD 4 4 +24VPD 4
16 SPMB 16 16 SPMB SPPD1 5 5 +24VPD SW 5
17 SPMB/ 17 17 SPMB/ GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
18 SPMO1 18 18 SPMO1 +5VPD 7 PALR-06VF / PAP-06V-S SPPD1
19 SPRS 19 19 SPRS SPPD2 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
20 STMPS 20 20 STMPS GND2 9 2 SPPD1 2 2 SPPD1
21 SRRC 21 21 SRRC +24VPD 10 3 GND2 3 3 GND2
22 SRVC 22 22 SRVC GND2 11 (NC) 4 +5VPD 4
23 SPWS 23 23 SPWS +24VPD SW 12 5 SPPD2 5
24 SELA 24 24 SELA B12B-PH-K-S 6 GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
25 SELB 25 25 SELB SPPD2
26 SELC 26 26 SELC 1 +5VPD
27 SSELO 27 27 SSELO 2 SPPD2
28 SPPD4 28 28 SPPD4 3 GND2
29 SPFMRV 29 29 SPFMRV
30 SPPD3 30 30 SPPD3
31 SPPD5 31 31 SPPD5 PS-187
32 +5VPD 32 32 +5VPD PS-187 SCOV
33 GND2 33 33 GND2 1 +24VPD
CN15 34 GND2 34 34 GND2
SPPD1 1 B34-PHDSS-B 1 +24VPD_SW
SPPD2 2 SPS-01T-187
SPFMCK 3
SPFMM1 4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
SPFMM2 5 F-GND F-GND
SPFMO1 6 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
SPFMO2 7 CN D PHR-4 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SPMA 8 +24VPD SRVC 1 1 +24VPD SRVC 1
SRVC/ 2 2 SRVC/ 2
SRVC
SPMA/ 9
SPMB 10 +24VPD SPRS 3
SPMB/ 11 SPRS/ 4
SPMO1 12 B04B-PH-K-S
SPRS 13 CN I SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
STMPS 14 (NC) 3 SPED 1 +24VPD SPRS 1
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 SPRS/ 2
SPRS
SRRC 15
SRVC 16 (NC) 1 +5VO
SPWS 17 B03B-PH-K-S
SELA_ 18
SELB_ 19 CN G PHR-8 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SELC_ 20 +24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
O. RSPF unit section (MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N) (P11B)
SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2
SRRC
SSELO 21
SPPD4 22 +5VPD 3
SPFMRV 23 SPPD3 4
SPPD3 24 GND2 5
SPPD5 25 SOCD 6 179228-3(BLACK)
+5VPD 26 GND2 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
SPED 27 (NC) +5VPD SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
NC 28 (NC) PHDR-28VS-1 B08B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3
B28-PHDSS-B 3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
5 GND2 5
6 +5VPD SOCD 6 179228-3
SOCD
179228-3
CN C PHR-9 SPLS1
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
B09B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
SPPD2
CN9 PHDR-16VS-2 1 +5VPD
+5V 1 2 SPPD2
+5V 2 3 GND2
SPPD1 3
SPPD2 4
SCN_CNT PWB GND2 5 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 6 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
GND2 7 3 GND2 3 3 GND2
GND2 8 5 GND2 5 2 SPPD3
CN16 PHR-14 PHR-14 CN5 SPPD3 9 2 SPPD3 2 1 +5VPD
GND2 1 1 GND2 SOCD 10 4 SOCD 4
GND2 2 2 GND2 +5V 11 1 +5VPD 1
+5VO 3 3 +5VO +5V 12 6 +5V_SOCD 6 179228-3
+3.3V 4 4 +3.3V +5V 13 SOCD
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V SPED 14 1 SOCD
+5V 6 6 +5V GND2 15 2 GND2
+5V 7 7 +5V N.C 16 3 +5VPD SOCD
+12V 8 8 +12V B16B-PHDSS-B
+12V 9 9 +12V
+24V 10 10 +24V 179228-3
+24V 11 11 +24V PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S SPED
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
CN2 PHDR-10VS-2
+5V 1 (NC)
+5V 2
CN13 501189-3030(MOLEX) 501189-3030(MOLEX) CN3 SPPD4 3 (NC)
DSDATA_0N 1 1 DSDATA_0N SPPD5 4
GND2 2 2 GND2 GND2 5 (NC)
DSDATA_0P 3 3 DSDATA_0P GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
CN_nPOF_DSPF 4 4 CN_nPOF_DSPF GND2 7 SPPD5
GND2 5 5 GND2 SPPD6 8 1 +5VPD
nLVDS_STBY1 8 8 nLVDS_STBY_SCN +5V 9 2 SPPD5
DSDATA_1N 7 7 DSDATA_1N N.C 10 (NC) 3 GND2
GND2 6 6 GND2 B10B-PHDSS-B
DSDATA_1P 9 9 DSDATA_1P
MM_nSTBY 10 10 MM_nSTBY 179228-3(BLACK)
CN_nDSPFUP 14 14 CN_nDSPFUP SPPD6
CN_SPED 12 12 CN_SPED 3 GND2
DSDATA_2N 13 13 DSDATA_2N 2 SPPD6
GND2 11 11 GND2 1 +5VPD
DSDATA_2P 15 15 DSDATA_2P
CN_RES_DSPF 16 16 CN_RES_DSPF
CN_nDSPF_INT 20 20 CN_nDSPF_INT PHR-9 179228-3
GND2 18 18 GND2 CN7 SPLS1
DSCLKOUT_N 19 19 DSCLKOUT_N +5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
GND2 17 17 GND2 SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
DSCLKOUT_P 21 21 DSCLKOUT_P GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 22 22 GND2 GND2 4
CN_TXD_DSPF 26 26 CN_RXD_SCN SPLS2 5
CN_RXD_DSPF 24 24 CN_TXD_SCN +5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
DSDATA_3N 25 25 DSDATA_3N AVCC 7 SPLS2
GND2 23 23 GND2 SPWS 8 2 GND2
DSDATA_3P 27 27 DSDATA_3P GND2 9 1 SPLS2
CN_nCTS_DSPF 28 28 CN_nRTS_SCN B9B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
GND2 29 29 GND2
CN_nRTS_DSPF 30 30 CN_nCTS_SCN
501190-3017 501190-3017
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND 3 GY GND2
3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
name "L" "H" No. No. name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN10 3 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADUMH ADU motor upper Drives the ADU upper section. – – CN17 3,4, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 5,6 4-phase signal.
ADUMHCNT ADU motor upper current Selects the ADU motor upper Large Small CN17 8 PCU
select current. current current
ADUML ADU motor lower Drives the ADU lower section. – – CN17 13,14, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 15,16 4-phase signal.
ADUMLCNT ADU motor lower current select Selects the ADU motor lower Large Small CN17 18 PCU
current. current current
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN6 12 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN6 14 PCU
[Transmission type] medium stream section.
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN2 2 SCNcnt
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the ON OFF CN7 3 SCNcnt
document for the CCD to scan
the document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 paper upper limit Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Upper limit – CN5 5 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 paper upper limit Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Upper limit – CN5 6 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 21 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 22 PCU
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN5 7 PCU
[Transmission type] 1.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN5 8 PCU
[Transmission type] 2.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN9 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN9 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller 2 in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass – CN5 3 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 1.
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass – CN5 4 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 2.
[Transmission type]
CPFM_CK Paper feed motor drive Changes the paper feed – – CN9 6 PCU Pulse input
frequency [Brush-less motor] section speed.
CPFM_D Paper feed motor start/stop Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN9 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor – Lock CN9 7 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN9 18 PCU
tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN9 20 PCU
tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN5 9 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity during lifting up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN5 10 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity during lifting up.
CSS11 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN5 15 PCU
CSS12 Tray 1 paper size detection 2 Tray 1 paper size detection 2 YES NO CN5 17 PCU
CSS13 Tray 1 paper size detection 3 Tray 1 paper size detection 3 YES NO CN5 19 PCU
CSS14 Tray 1 paper size detection 4 Tray 1 paper size detection 4 YES NO CN5 21 PCU
CSS21 Tray 2 paper size detection 1 Tray 2 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN5 16 PCU
CSS22 Tray 2 paper size detection 2 Tray 2 paper size detection 2 YES NO CN5 18 PCU
CSS23 Tray 2 paper size detection 3 Tray 2 paper size detection 3 YES NO CN5 20 PCU
CSS24 Tray 2 paper size detection 4 Tray 2 paper size detection 4 YES NO CN5 22 PCU
DM_CK Drum motor drive frequency Changes the drum section – – CN14 6 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor] speed.
DM_D Drum motor start/stop Drives the drum section. Drive Stop CN14 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
DM_LD Drum motor lock detection Detects the drum motor lock. – Lock CN14 5 PCU
detection
d
i
k
h
l
p 1
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
j
n
g
f C
e
m B
a
o 2
c
A 4
1 3
B
2
1 A
MX-M503N EXTERIOR A – 1
(4) Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear (6) Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the Right cabinet rear cover
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B). 1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
A
B
2
1
2
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet
rear.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D).
B 2
A 4
3
MX-M503N EXTERIOR A – 2
(8) Front cover
1) Remove the toner cartridge. [Refer to "[i] Toner supply sec-
tion."]
2) Remove the developing unit. [Refer to "[J] DEVELOPING
SECTION"]
3) Remove the photo-conductor unit. [Refer to "[H] PHOTO-CON-
DUCTOR SECTION"]
4) Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray cabi-
net.
5) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
6) Remove the band and the hinge, and remove the front cabinet.
MX-M503N EXTERIOR A – 3
3 PDSEL2
2 PDSEL1
1 PDSEL0
4 +5VN
MX-M503N
5 PD
ORS PD PWB
6 GND2
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 CN2 CN1
+12V 3 2 +12V PDSEL2 20 4 +5VO
LCD
+5VN 4 4 +5VN PDSEL1 23 6 GND2
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V PDSEL0 22 8 WU_LED
GND2 6 6 GND2 +5VN 25 12 nINFO_LED
B6P-VH B6P-VH PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
MOTHER PWB
CN7 CN11 GND2 21 10 POW_LED
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- GND2 39 1 GND2
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ GND2 40 2 GND2
TOUCH PANEL
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
2
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- GND2 27 20 GND2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nBZR 34 16 nBZR
BACK LIGHT
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
PWB
CN5 CN5 GND2 16 CN4
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 17 GND2 5 5 GND2
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 14 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN +3.3V 15 +24V3 3 3 +24V3
[B] OPERATION PANEL
5
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +5VN 13 GND2 1 1 GND2
+24V3 10 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK-1
LCD INVERTER
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN XH(X1) 9 XH(X1) 3
GND2 10 10 GND2 YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2
nSPED 11 11 nSPED nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B VCONT 5 7 GND2 CN2
nCCFT 2 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
1
DISP 1 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
501190-4017 25 +3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
PWB
CN9 19 +3.3V GND2 5 5 GND2
nA_PNC 1 23 +5VN NC 6 6 NC
nA_COPY 2 3 +24V3 R0 7 7 R0
MOTHER
nA_CA 3 5 +24V3 R1 8 8 R1
CN6 nA_READY 4 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
nPWR_SW 10 nA_AUD 5 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 11 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
6
+5VN 6
GND2 12 GND2 7 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
(NC) 1 (NC) +24V3 8 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 9 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
+5VO 3 10 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
SCN-CNT PWB
nA_TC
3
GND2 4 +24V3 11 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nWU_LED 5 PNC-a 12 (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 G2 17 17 G2
LVDS PWB
nINFO_LED 6 GND2 13 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
8.5inch LCD UN
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
LCD_DATA2- 20 WH WH 20 LCD_DATA2- B5 29 29 B5
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 22 WH WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 24 SD SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 25 PK PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
PWRSW
CN4
(NC) 28 (NC) +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
+5VN 1
(NC) 29 (NC) +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
GND2 2
(NC) 30 (NC) NC 39 39 NC
/OCSW 3
501190-3017(MOLEX) +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
+24V3 4
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
/SIZE_LED1 5
Service Manual
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB
4
OCSW
POWER SW PWB
3 n PWRSW
2 GND2
1 GND2
1 +5VN
2 GND2
CN16 CN CN
3 OCSW
VBUS2 10 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 4 D2- D2- 2
+24V3
D2+ 8 3 D2+ D2+ 3
/SIZE_LED1
PWB
GND2 7 2 GND2 GND2 4
/SIZE_LED2
SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
ORS LED
BM05B-GHS-TBT F-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
USB PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operation panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
3 PDSEL2
2 PDSEL1
1 PDSEL0
4 +5VN
5 PD
ORS PD PWB
6 GND2
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 CN2 CN1
+12V 3 2 +12V PDSEL2 20 4 +5VO
LCD
+5VN 4 4 +5VN PDSEL1 23 6 GND2
1 : '10/Jun/01
MOTHER PWB
CN7 CN11 GND2 21 10 POW_LED
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- GND2 39 1 GND2
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ 2 GND2
2
GND2 40
TOUCH PANEL
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- GND2 27 20 GND2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nBZR 34 16 nBZR
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
1
DISP 1 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
501190-4017 25 +3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
PWB
CN9 19 +3.3V GND2 5 5 GND2
nA_PNC 1 23 +5VN NC 6 6 NC
nA_COPY 2 3 +24V3 R0 7 7 R0
MOTHER
nA_CA 3 5 +24V3 R1 8 8 R1
CN6 nA_READY 4 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
nPWR_SW 10 nA_AUD 5 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 11 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
5
+5VN 6
GND2 12 GND2 7 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
(NC) 1 (NC) +24V3 8 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 9 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
+5VO 3 10 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
SCN-CNT PWB
nA_TC
3
GND2 4 +24V3 11 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nWU_LED 5 PNC-a 12 (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 G2 17 17 G2
LVDS PWB
nINFO_LED 6 GND2 13 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
nWU_KEY 7 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3 G3 19 19 G3
7.0inch LCD UN
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
LCD_DATA2- 20 WH WH 20 LCD_DATA2- B5 29 29 B5
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 22 WH WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 24 SD SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
PWRSW
CN4
(NC) 28 (NC) +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
+5VN 1
(NC) 29 (NC) +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
GND2 2
(NC) 30 (NC) NC 39 39 NC
/OCSW 3
501190-3017(MOLEX) +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
+24V3 4
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB
4
OCSW
POWER SW PWB
3 n PWRSW
2 GND2
1 GND2
1 +5VN
2 GND2
CN16 CN CN
3 OCSW
VBUS2 10 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 4 D2- D2- 2
+24V3
D2+ 8 3 D2+ D2+ 3
/SIZE_LED1
PWB
GND2 7 2 GND2 GND2 4
/SIZE_LED2
SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
ORS LED
BM05B-GHS-TBT F-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
USB PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operation panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
ORS PD PWB
6 GND2
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 CN2 CN1
+12V 3 2 +12V PDSEL2 20 4 +5VO
+5VN 4 4 +5VN PDSEL1 23 6 GND2
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V PDSEL0 22 8 WU_LED
LCD
GND2 6 6 GND2 +5VN 25 12 nINFO_LED
B6P-VH B6P-VH PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
MOTHER PWB
CN7 CN11 GND2 21 10 POW_LED
2
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- GND2 39 1 GND2
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ GND2 40 2 GND2
TOUCH PANEL
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- GND2 27 20 GND2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nBZR 34 16 nBZR
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
BACK LIGHT
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
5
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2 +CCFT 1
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0 /CCFT 2
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 GND2 36 501190-2017
C. 8.1 inch operation panel
PWB
CN5 CN5 GND2 16
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 17 CN4
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 14 /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN +3.3V 15 GND2 2 2 GND2
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 12 +24V3 3 1 +24V3
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +5VN 13 S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
+24V3 10
LCD INVERTER
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN XH(X1) 9 XH(X1) 3
GND2 10 10 GND2 YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2
nSPED 11 11 nSPED nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B VCONT 5 7 GND2
CN4
nCCFT 2 29 GND2
VO 1 15 VO
PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2
LP 2 14 LP
DISP 1 40 GND2
1
GND2 3 13 GND2
501190-4017 25 +3.3V
CP 4 12 CP
PWB
CN9 19 +3.3V
GND2 5 11 GND2
nA_PNC 1 23 +5VN
+3.3V 6 10 +3.3V
nA_COPY 2 3 +24V3
M 7 9 M
MOTHER
nA_CA 3 5 +24V3
D0 8 8 D0
CN6 nA_READY 4 37 /YL(Y1)
D1 9 7 D1
nPWR_SW 10 nA_AUD 5 35 XH(X1)
GND2 10 6 GND2
GND2 11 +5VN 6 33 YH(Y2)
D2 11 5 D2
GND2 12 GND2 7 31 /XL(X2)
D3 12 4 D3
(NC) 1 (NC) +24V3 8 27 SC_TEMP
GND2 13 3 GND2
(NC) 2
8.1inch LCD UN
(NC) (NC) 9 21 VCONT
DISP 14 2 DISP
+5VO 3 17 /CCFT
6
10
SCN-CNT PWB
nA_TC
VEE 15 1 VEE
GND2
nWU_LED
4
5
+24V3
PNC-a
11
12 (NC)
15
13
PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1 52030-2629 52030-2629 3
LVDS PWB
nINFO_LED 6 GND2 13 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2
nWU_KEY 7 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3
PWRSW
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029
CN4
(NC) 28 (NC)
+5VN 1
(NC) 29 (NC)
GND2 2
(NC) 30 (NC)
/OCSW 3
501190-3017(MOLEX)
+24V3 4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB
4
OCSW
POWER SW PWB
3 n PWRSW
2 GND2
1 GND2
1 +5VN
2 GND2
CN16 CN CN
3 OCSW
VBUS2 10 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 4 D2- D2- 2
+24V3
D2+ 8 3 D2+ D2+ 3
/SIZE_LED1
PWB
GND2 7 2 GND2 GND2 4
/SIZE_LED2
SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
ORS LED
BM05B-GHS-TBT F-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
USB PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
1 : '10/Jun/01
*1 *2
*3
*1
*4 *1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
*4: Disconnect the connector from the Mylar.
3) Remove the screw, remove the earth harness from the (2) USB connector PWB
machine, and turn the operation panel back. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
* When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and
remove the earth sheet and the 8.5 MFP OPE PWB.
f b
d
g
a
Parts
a POWER SW PWB
b MFP OPE-P PWB
c USB connector PWB 3) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the MFP
d LCD INV PWB OPE-P PWB.
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
*1
*1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
3) Put the operation panel upside down.
&52(&4+8'429$
%0$
52/# 52/#
82&A52/
82&A52/
52/# 52/#
52/$ 52/$
82&A52/
82&A52/
52/$ 52/$
%0'
82&544%
544% 5%18
82&
82&
82&
&52(A%0629$ )0&
82&59
0%
82&59
82&A59
3
%0
8
82&
8
82& 522&
522& 522&
82&
522& 522& 522&
)0& )0& )0&
)0& )0&
8 52'&
52'&
8A52'& 52'&
)0& 52'& )0&
0% )0&
852'& SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
%0 52.5
8A52.5
82&52.5
52.5 52.5
)0& )0&
)0&
52.5 52.5
8A52.5 )0&
#8%% 52.5
5295
82&52.5
)0&
#8%% $. #8%%
5295 $4 5295
)0& ); )0&
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3 FAN
SPPD5
2
SOCD
3 SPPD6 (SPOD)
4 STMPS
5
82&51%&
522&
82&
51%&
)0&
)0&
82&56/25
82&A52(/
82&A52(/
82&544%
82&(#0
56/25
56/27
(#0A.1%-
)0&
52(/#
52(/$
52(/#
52(/$
544%
)0&
0%
0%
0%
%0(
%0'
%0%
%0&
82&
522&
522&
82&
&52(&4+8'429$
)0&
)0&
82&56/25
(#0A101((
82&544%
82&52(%
82&A52(/
82&A52(/
(#0A.1%-
82&(#0
8A51%&
82&
82&
52(/%-
52(//
52(//
52(/1
52(/1
52(/48
(#0A.1%-
52/$
52/1
56/25
56/27
82&
52/#
56/25
52(/$
52(/#
522&
82&
)0&
)0&
52/$
544%
52(%
5%18
)0&
)0&
52/#
544%
52(%
56/27
52(/$
52(/#
)0&
)0&
51%&
8
)0&
)0&
0%
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
8
%0#
%0
0%
0%
0%
0%
%0
%0
%0
%0
&52(A%0629$
(#0A.1%-
82&
82&
52(/%-
(#0A10
52(//
52(//
52(/1
52(/1
52(/48
522&
52/$
52/1
56/25
522&
522&
522&
56/27
82&
52/#
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
51%&
)0&
)0&
52/$
544%
52(%
5%18
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
52/#
)0&
#8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0%
8
CN F
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
+24VPD_SPM 2 5 +24VPD _SPM
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
+24VPD_SPM 5 2 +24VPD _SPM
SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
N.C. 7 (NC)
B7B-PH-K-S
CN H
SPED 1
GND2 2
+5V SPED 3 PALR-06VF / PAP-06V-S
+5VPD 4 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
SPPD1 5 2 SPPD1 2 2 SPPD1
GND2 6 3 GND2 3 3 GND2
+5VPD 7 4 +5VPD 4
SPPD2 8 5 SPPD2 5 1 +5VPD
GND2 9 6 GND2 6 2 SPPD2
+24VPD 10 3 GND2
GND2
+24VPD SW
11
12
B12B-PH-K-S
(NC)
SPM
SCN-CNT RSPF
PWB DRIVER SPPD2
GND2
CN16
1
PWB
GND2 2
+5VO 3 (NC) CN A
+3.3V 4 34 GND2
+3.3V 5 (NC) 33 GND2
+5V
+5V
6
7
(NC) 8
7
+3.3V
+5V
2 SCOV
+12V 8 (NC) 6 +24VPD
+12V 9 (NC) 5 +24VPD
+24V 10 2 GND2
+24V 11 1 GND2
GND2 12 (NC) 3 SPPD1
GND2 13 4 SPPD2
GND2 14 9 SPFMCK
B14B-PH-K-S
CN15
10
11
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPPD1
SPPD1 1 12 SPFMO1
SPPD2 2 13 SPFMO2
SPFMCK 3 14 SPMA
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
4
5
6
15
16
17
SPMA/
SPMB
SPMB/
SPED 1
SPFMO2 7 18 SPMO1
SPMA 8 19 SPRS
SPMA/ 9 20 STMPS
SPMB 10 21 SRRC
SPMB/ 11 22 SRVC
SPMO1 12 23 SPWS
SPRS 13 24 SELA
STMPS 14 25 SELB
SRRC 15 26 SELC
SRVC 16 27 SSELO
SPWS 17 28 SPPD4
SELA_
SELB_
18
19
29
30
31
SPFMRV
SPPD3
SPPD5
3
SELC_ 20
SSELO 21 32 +5VPD PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S
SPPD4 22 B34-PHDSS-B 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
SPFMRV 23 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
SPPD3 24 3 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
SPPD5 25 4 +24VPD 4
+5VPD 26 5 +24VPD SW 5 1 +24VPD
SPED 27 (NC) 1 +24VPD_SW
NC 28 (NC)
B28-PHDSS-B
SPWS
+5V_SPLS1
SPLS1
CN C
1
2
3
1
+5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1
SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2
SPLS2
+5V_SPLS2
4
5
6
SPLS2
AVCC 7
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
B09B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3
SRVC
SPPD5 SPRS
2
3
SOCD
STMPS
5
4
+5VPD SOCD
SPPD3
+5VPD
SOCD
GND2
GND2
1
2
3
1
2
3
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
179228-4
+24VPD SRRC
+5VPD SOCD
+24VPD_SPFM
+24VPD_SPFM
4
3
2
1
SPPD5
+5VPD
GND2
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPFMA
SPFMB
SPPD3
+5VPD
SRRC/
SOCD
GND2
GND2
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
+24VPD STMPS
1
2
1
2
292254-4
STMPS/
STMPU
GND2
+24VPD SPRS
+24VPD SRVC
SPRS/
SRVC/
1
2
3
SPFM
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
179228-4
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN E
CN B
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN D
B6B-PH-K-S
B08B-PH-K-S
B04B-PH-K-S
CN G
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
+24VPD SRRC
+24VPD STMPS
+5VPD SOCD
+24VPD_SPFM
+24VPD_SPFM
+24VPD SRVC
+24VPD SPRS
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPFMRV
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
STMPS/
+24VPD
+24VPD
STMPU
SPFMA
SPFMB
SPMO1
STMPS
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
+5VPD
SSELO
+5VPD
+5VPD
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD5
SRRC/
+5VPD
SRVC/
SPRS/
SPMA/
SPMB/
SOCD
SPWS
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
SRRC
SPMA
SPMB
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
SPRS
SRVC
+3.3V
SELC
SELA
SELB
+5V
B34-PHDSS-B
34
33
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
CN A
8
7
6
5
2
1
3
4
9
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN16
CN15
B28-PHDSS-B
B14B-PH-K-S
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCN-CNT
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPFMRV
SPMO1
STMPS
SSELO
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
SELC_
SELA_
SELB_
SPMA/
SPMB/
SPWS
SRRC
SPMA
SPMB
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
SPRS
SPED
SRVC
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VO
+12V
+12V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
PWB
NC
SPWS
SPLS1 SPLS2
6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet) The document is transported to the scan section. After being
scanned, the document discharged to the document exit tray by the
(Stamp solenoid ON)
paper exit roller.
The document transport speed depends on the resolution as
shown below.
a
9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet) g
(Stamp solenoid ON) e
f
d
b
4) Open the DSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and
slide the DSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the DSPF unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the document tray lower and
the paper guide.
6) Remove the step screw. Remove the DSPF CIS unit. Discon-
nect the connector.
NOTE: Never touch the light source and the lens of the DSPF CIS
unit.
NOTE: Install so that the round hole of the DSPF CIS unit is on the
rear side of the mark, and tighten the screws in the
sequence of the round hole and then the long hole.
(6) PS clutch
1) Remove the document tray.
2) Remove the transport unit.
3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
NOTE: When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame.
a
e
Parts
a Reverse clutch
b PS clutch
c Paper feed motor
d Transport motor
e Pressure release solenoid
f RSPF driver PWB
70mm
30mm
Cable tie
4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the docu-
ment tray.
4) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
NOTE: Do not use the attached harness. Use the original harness.
If the motor harness needs replacement, order the harness
shown in the parts guide.
(2) PS clutch
1) Remove the transport unit.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
NOTE: When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame.
MHPS
6 9
3
MIM
7
4
CLI
3
1
2
8
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
8
8
%0
%0
˴
%0˴
%0˴˴
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
%.A10
219'4
.'&
.'&
/*25
)0&
)0&
)0&
80
8
8
8
0%
2
˴
%0˴
.'&&4+8'429$
%0
%0
%0
5%0%0629$
/+/A:#
/+/A:$
%.A10
219'4
/+/A#
/+/A$
/*25
)0&
80
)0&
)0&
8
4'5A%%&#&
#('A5%.-
#('A%56)
#('A94&
#('A4&&
#('A%5
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
%.-
%.-
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
4'
4%
4'
4$
4$
4&
4&
4%
4#
4#
#8
#8
#8
%0
%0
4'5A%%&#&
#('A5%.-
#('A%56)
#('A94&
#('A4&&
#('A%5
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
)0&
%.-
%.-
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
4'
4'
4&
4&
4%
4%
4$
4$
4#
#8
#8
#8
4#
4#
%%&29$
MHPS
5
4
6 9
3
MIM
7
CLI
3
1
2
8
1
2
MHPS
GND2
+5VN
+24V3
+24V3
GND1
GND1
CL
5597-05APB
CL INVERTER
MHPS
PWB
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
2
CN
CN17
CN7
CN1
B3B-PH-K-S
5597-05CPB7F
B4B-PH-SM4-TB
SCN-CNT PWB
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
/RES_CCDAD
AFE_CSTG
AFE_SCLK
AFE_WRD
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
MIM_XA
MIM_XB
CLK+
A10V
A10V
CLK-
RD+
RC+
RE+
RB+
RA+
A5V
A5V
A5V
MIM_A
MIM_B
RD-
RC-
RE-
RB-
RA-
+24V3
+24V3
MHPS
GND2
GND1
GND1
+5VN
CL
FI-RE41S-VF
CN10
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
FI-RE41S-VF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/RES_CCDAD
AFE_CSTG
AFE_SCLK
AFE_WRD
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
CLK+
A10V
A10V
CLK-
RD+
RC+
RE+
RB+
RA+
A5V
A5V
A5V
RD-
RC-
RE-
RB-
RA-
CCD PWB
Timing
Generator
CCD Elements
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
3LINES CCD UNIT Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).
CCD Elements h
f
CCD UNIT
e
g
Parts
a LED lamp (N model)
b LED drive PWB (N model)
c Scanner lamp (U model)
d CL inverter PWB (U model)
e CCD unit
f Scanner motor
g Document detection light receiving PWB
h Document detection light emitting PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. 8) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the DSPF/RSPF unit. [Refer to "[C] DSPF/RSPF
SECTION."]
3) Remove the operation base plate. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
4) Remove the operation panel unit. [Refer to "[B] OPERATION
PANEL."]
5) Remove the upper cabinet rear, the upper cabinet right, the
upper cabinet left, and the rear cabinet.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
6) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
the harness from the wire saddle.
C B
2) Move the LED lamp unit to the position where there are
notches in the frame.
3 2
3) While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder
and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit.
C B
C B
2) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and (5) Document detection light receiving PWB
remove the CCD unit. 1) Remove the operation base plate. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection
N model light receiving PWB.
CN9
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/CPFM_D 4 (NC) 3 FG-OUT
CPFM_CK 6 5 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 7 (NC) 7 CW/CCW
B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 4 /CPFM_CK
CN17 6 CPFM_LD
GND2 1 (NC)
GND2 2 (NC) CN4 CN1
ADUMHB 3 14 ADUMHB PFM24V 1 2 PFM24V
ADUMHA 4 25 ADUMHA PFM24V 2 5 PFM24V
ADUMHXB 5 16 ADUMHXB PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/
ADUMHXA 6 23 ADUMHXA PFMB// 4 6 PFMB//
POMCNT 7 11 POMCNT PFMA// 5 4 PFMA//
ADUMHCNT 8 21 ADUMHCNT PFMA/ 6 1 PFMA/
POMB 9 17 POMB B06B-PASK-1
POMA 10 15 POMA
POMXB 11 19 POMXB
PCU PWB POMXA 12 13 POMXA
ADUMLB 13 26 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 14 22 ADUMLA
ADUMLXB 15 24 ADUMLXB
ADUMLXA 16 20 ADUMLXA
CN10
8 /MPGS RRMCNT 17 1 RRMCNT MOTOR
(NC) 6 24V1B ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
DRIVER
7
5
/MPFS
24V1B
RRMB
RRMA
19
20
7
5
RRMB
RRMA PWB
PFM
4 /MPUC RRMXB 21 9 RRMXB
2 24V1B RRMXA 22 3 RRMXA
B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) PFMB 23 10 PFMB
PFMA 24 8 PFMA
QR/P4-32P-C(01) / QR/P4-32S-C(02) CN6
PFMXB 25 12 PFMXB
1 5VN 1 1 5VN
PFMXA 26 6 PFMXA
2 SIN3 2 11 SIN3 (NC) (NC)
PFM2CNT 27 2 GND2
3 SELIN2 3 7 SELIN2
PFMCNT 28 4 PFMCNT
4 APPD1 4 12 APPD1 (NC)
PFM2B 29 B26B-PNDZS-1
5 MPFD 5 8 MPFD (NC)
PFM2A 30
6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD (NC)
PFM2XB 31
17 GND2 17 15 GND2 (NC)
PFM2XA 32
CN1 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1 (NC)
(nc) 33
5VN 1 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3 (NC)
(nc) 34
SIN3
SELIN2
3
5
20
21
APPD2
POD3
20
21
14
10
APPD2
POD3
B34B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CPFM MPUC
APPD1 7 22 5VN 22 3 5VN
NC(APPD3) 9 28 /MPGS 28 20 5VN
MPFD 11 12 /MPFS 12 23 GND2
MPWD 13 13 24V1B 13 22 PCS
NC(HUD_M) 15 30 /MPUC 30 21 PCS_LED
GND2 2 31 24V1B 31 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
SELIN1 4
SELIN3 6 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
APPD2
POD3
8
10
1
2
24V1B
/MPUC
1
2
4
NC(FAX_D) 12 1
NC(TH_M) 14
5VN 16
S16B-PHDSS-B
5
MPFD MPFS
3
2
MPED MTOP1
RIGHT DOOR
I/F PWB
MPWD MTOP2
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC MPGS
PHNR-08-H/BU08P-TR-P-H/PHNR-08-H
8 24V1B 1
1
2
24V1B
/MPFS
1
2
MPLD
CN3 7 /MPFS 2
MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
GND2 8 5 GND2 4 2 GND2
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5 3 5VLED7
5VLED11 12 3 5VLED11 6
MPFD 10 2 /MPGS 7
S32B-PHDSS-B 1 MPFD 8
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
PHNR-05-H/BU05P-TR-P-H/PHNR-05-H 1 24V1B 1
6 24V1B 6 5 24V1B 1 2 /MPGS 2
4 24V1B 4 4 /MPGS 2
2 24V1B 2 3 MPFD 3 1 MPFD
5 GND2 5 2 GND2 4 2 GND2
3 GND2 3 1 5VLED11 5 3 5VLED11
1 GND2 1
DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DS-SP2(05)
PHNR-09-H/BU09P-TR-P-H/PHNR-09-H
9 (NC) 1
8 (NC) 2
PHNR-14-H/BU14P-TR-P-H/PHNR-14-H
H-41-RNHP/H-P-RT-P41UB/H-41-RNHP 7 (NC) 3 1 MPLD
CN3 14 (NC) 1 6 MPLD 4 2 GND2
MPLD 16 13 (NC) 2 5 GND2 5 3 5VLED12
NC(GND2) 17 12 MPLD 3 4 5VLED12 6
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 3 5VN 7 3 5VN
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 1 GND2 9 1 GND2
NC(GND2) 21 8 MTOP2 7
MTOP2 22 7 5VLED13 8
NC(GND2) 23 6 MTOP1 9
5VLED13 24 5 5VLED9 10 1 MTOP2
MTOP1 25 4 (NC) 11 2 GND2
NC(GND2) 26 3 (NC) 12 3 5VLED13
5VLED9 27 2 GND2 13
GND2 14 1 (NC) 14 1 MTOP1
5 (NC)
S32B-PHDSS-B 2 GND2
3 5VLED9
6
4
3
2
1
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CPFM_CK 4 4 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 6 CPFM_CK
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H 7 CPFM_LD
GND2 3 1 24V1B 2 15 24V1B
CLUD1 2 2 /CPFC1 1 16 /CPFC1
8
(NC) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
(NC) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VN 1 21 CLUM1
22 CLUM2
PHNR-14-H / BU14P-TR-P-H / PHNR-14-H
GND2 3 23 GND2
14 GND2 1
CPED1 2 24 GND2
13 CLUD1 2
5VN 1 14 /CPFC2
12 5VN 3
13 24V1B
11 GND2 4
GND2 3 B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
10 CPED1 5
CPFD1 2
9 5VN 6
5VN 1
8 GND2 7
7 CPFD1 8
GND2 3
6 5VN 9
DSW_C 2
5 GND2 10
5VN 1
4 DSW_C 11
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC 3 5VN 12
1 /CPFC2 1 2 /CPFC2 13
2 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 14
CPFC2 CPUC1
CPFM
PCU PWB
CLUD1 4
CPED1
CPFC1
2
1
3 DSW_C
10 CPUC2
9
CPFD1
CSS11 CLUM1 /CLUM1 2
/CLUM2 2
GND2 1
CPED2 CSS21
CSS22
3
4
B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CSS23 5
CSS24 6
CPFD2 CLUD2
5VN
2
1
8
7
CLUD2
5VN
2
3
7 8 6 GND2 4
GND2 3 5 CPED2 5
CPED2 2 4 5VN 6
12 5VN 1 3
2
GND2
CPFD2
7
8
GND2 3 1 5VN 9
CSS21 CPFD2 2
10
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
5VN 1
CSS23 CSS22
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
CSS24
10
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
SSJC6-4
CSPD2 CLUM2
11
2. Operational descriptions
A. Bypass B. Tray paper feed
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, (1) Paper feed front operation
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
to the paper feed roller section.
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the • The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual stops at the specified position.
transport roller. (2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
ing, feeding paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
• The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
• The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
Parts
a Manual paper feed gate solenoid
b Paper pickup solenoid
3
1
3
4 (1) Manual paper feed gate solenoid
5 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
1
2
2
1 1
1 Parts
a Paper transport clutch 2
Parts
a Paper size detection PWB
CN1
PFM24V 2 1 PFM24V
1
PFM24V 5 2 PFM24V
2 PFM PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/
PFMB// 6 4 PFMB//
PFMA// 4 5 PFMA//
PFMA/ 1 6 PFMA/
PHR-6 B06B-PASK-1
PPD2
3 PCU PWB
179228-3 SMR-07V-N / SMP-07V-NC CN6
5VN 1 5 5VN 5 25 5VN
PPD2 2 6 PPD2 6 26 PPD2
GND1 3 7 GND2 7 24 GND2
1 5VN 1 2 5VN
PPD1 2 PPD1 2 4 PPD1
3 GND2 3 6 GND2
179228-3 4 (NC) 4 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5VN 1
PPD1 2
GND2 3
1 MX-M283/M363/M453/M503 N
GND2
GND2
9
10
SD
SD
SD
SD
14
13
GND2
GND2
CN1 CN1 CLCLK_N 11 WH WH 11 LSU_CLK_N
POLYCLK 1 1 nPOLY_CK CLCLK_P 12 PK PK 12 LSU_CLK_P
/LOCK 2 2 nPOLY_LOCK CH3_N 13 WH WH 9 LSU_CH3_N
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START CH3_P 14 PK PK 10 LSU_CH3_P
GND1 4 4 GND1 GND2 15 SD SD 8 GND2
+24V3 5 5 +24V3 GND2 16 7 GND2
BM05B-PASS-TFT B5B-PH-K-S ECLK_LSU_N 17 WH WH 5 LSU_ECLK_N
ECLK_LSU_P 18 PK PK 6 LSU_ECLK_P
1 MX-M363/M453/M503 U, MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N
CN1 CN1
GND2
GND2
19
20
SD
SD
SD
SD
4
3
GND2
GND2
nPOLY_CK 2 1 nPOLY_CK HSYNC_LSU_P 21 PK PK 2 LSU_HSYNC_P
nPOLY_LOCK 3 2 nPOLY_LOCK HSYNC_LSU_N 22 WH WH 1 LSU_HSYNC_N
nPOLY_START 4 3 nPOLY_START S22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B22B-PHDSS-B
GND1 5 4 GND1
+24V3 6 5 +24V3
nBRAKE 1 6 nBRAKE
B6B-PH-SM4-TB B6B-PH-K-S
PGM
8
1 5
2
4
3
7 6
LSUCFM
A. LSU removal
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer
to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
3) Disconnect the LSU connectors, and remove the securing
screws to remove the LSU.
(Scanning system)
NOTE: Tip the LSU slightly to insert the alignment boss into the
LSU alignment hole. To check for proper alignment,
remove the toner cartridge to check.
Number of Rotating
Model Bearing
mirror surface speed
N 45/50 CPM model 7 surfaces 45556rpm AIR
N 28/36 CPM model 7 surfaces 35433rpm AIR
U 45/50 CPM model 7 surfaces 22778rpm OIL
U 36 CPM model 7 surfaces 17716rpm OIL
OZFM
DM
PSPS
MC
3
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
5 INT24V1
GND2
1
2
1
2
INT24V1
GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
2 24V1B 2 17 24V1B
1 1 /PSPS 1 18 /PSPS
CN15
1 OZFM_V 1 21 OZFM_V
2 /OZFM_CNT 2 19 /OZFM_CNT
2 3
4
GND2
OZFM_LD
3
4
17
15
GND2
OZFM_LD
HV PWB CN3
RD CN1 20 /HV_CLK
MHV /HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
/HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
YL HV_REM# 7 23 /HV_REM#
1 GB /HV_LD# 5 24 /HV_LD
(NC) 2 (NC) MHV-T 6 (NC) 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1 DC PWB
TNBOX FW
CN7
1
GND1 2
TNF GND1 3 (NC) PCU PWB
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB
GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
5V_TNF 3
TNF 1
GND2 2 CN16
1 5V_TNF 1 10 5V_TNF 10 15 5V_TNF
2 TNF 2 11 TNF 11 17 TNF
3 GND2 3 12 GND2 12 19 GND2
5V_TNBOX 3 4 5V_TNBOX 4 13 5V_TNBOX 13 16 5V_TNBOX
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5 14 TNBOX 14 18 TNBOX
GND2 2 6 GND2 6 15 GND2 15 20 GND2
Screen grid
TNBOX
TNF
High voltage unit
OPC drum
CTL
CGL
Waste toner detection is performed by two sensors (TNBOX,
Aluminum layer TNF).
The following four statuses of the waste toner box are detected
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The by the two sensors as shown below.
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid. Output level Sensor status
Pattern Status
TNBOX TNF TNBOX TNF
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
1 L H Transmitted Interrupted Waste toner
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. box not
provided
2 L L Transmitted Transmitted Waste toner
box provided
+ Not full
3 H L Interrupted Transmitted Waste toner
OPC drum OPC drum box provided
+ Near end
4 H H Interrupted Interrupted Waste toner
Laser beams box provided
+ Full
Aluminum layer
CGL
CTL
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on
the OPC drum surface.
CN15
GND2 4 1 GND2 1 16 GND2
5VN 3 2 5VN 2 10 5VN
CRUM_CLK 2 3 CRUM_CLK 3 12 CRUM_CLK
CRUM_DATA 1 4 CRUM_DATA 4 14 CRUM_DATA
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
DM
PCU PWB
CRUM
TDSC
CN3
2 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1 3 24V1B
1 /TDSC 1 2 /TDSC 2 4 /TDSC
DM
TH_DV/
HUD_DV
FGOUT 3 (NC)
3 CW/CCW
INT24V1
7
1
(NC) CN14
1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
CN1
GND2 3 1 GND2 1 18 GND2
HUD_DV 2 2 HUD_DV 2 20 HUD_DV
TH_DV 4 3 TH_DV 3 22 TH_DV
+3.3V 1 4 +3.3V 4 24 +3.3V
5 5
1 1
6 2 2 6
7 3 3 7 PCU PWB
4 4
8 8
1 CN3
TSGout 1 1 TSGout 1 3 TSGout 3 7 TSGout
GND2 4 2 GND2 2 4 GND2 4 8 GND2
TCS 3 3 TCS 3 5 TCS 5 9 TCS
24V1B 2 4 24V1B 4 6 24V1B 6 10 24V1B
5 DVCH1 5 7 DVCH1 7 (NC) 11 5VN
6 DVCH2 6 8 DVCH2 8 12 DVCH1
7 DVCH3 7 9 DVCH3 9 (NC) 13 GND2
8 GND2 8 10 GND2 10 14 DVCH2
(NC) 15 /TNCRU
16 DVCH3
17 GND2
TCS HV PWB
(NC)
(NC)
18
19
reserve1-in
/DVBSREM
CN1 20 /HV_CLK
/HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
/HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
GR
HV_REM# 7 23 /HV_REM#
1 DVBS /HV_LD# 5 24 /HV_LD
(NC) 2 (NC) MHV-T 6 (NC) 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1
DC PWB
CN7
FW 1
GND1 2
GND1 3 (NC)
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB
GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias (negative).
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
When rotation of the OPC drum is started and stopped, some area
on the OPC drum is not charged negatively. To prevent toner from
attaching to that area, a positive voltage is applied to the drum.
OPC drum 3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
DM
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
HV PWB INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
BL GND2 2 2 GND2
PCS (NC)
1
2
DHV
(NC)
/DM_D
DM_LD
5
6
4
5
/DM_D
DM_LD
WH DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
THV
CN3
CN1 20 /HV_CLK
/HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
1 /HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
RDCFM HV_REM#
/HV_LD#
7
5
(NC)
23
24
/HV_REM#
/HV_LD
MHV-T 6 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1
DC PWB
CN7
FW 1
GND1 2
GND1 3 (NC)
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB PCU PWB
2 GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
HV RESISTOR PWB 2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
CPWBF1593FCE2
FG FG CN6
20 5VN
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 (NC) 23 GND2
7 F-GND 7 7 5VN 7
PCS 2 2 PCS 2 (NC) (NC) 22 PCS
6 5VN 6 8 (NC) 8
PCS_LED 3 3 PCS_LED 3 21 PCS_LED
5 PCS 5 9 PCS 9
4 PCS_LED 4 10 PCS_LED 10 CN10
1 RDCFM_V 1 3 RDCFM_V 3 11 RDCFM_V 11 11 RDCFM_V
2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 26 GND2 26 15 GND2
3 RDCFM_LD 3 1 RDCFM_LD 1 27 RDCFM_LD 27 13 RDCFM_LD
OPC drum
Separation charger
Transfer roller
Toner patch
To PCU PWB
Transfer roller
Image density sensor
B. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning process, the polarity of the voltage applied to the
transfer roller is made negative, and unnecessary toner on the
transfer roller is sent to the OPC drum, cleaned with the cleaning
blade, and transported to the waste toner section.
OPC drum
Separation charger
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
Transfer roller
CN12
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 3 GND2
/FUMCK 4 3 FUM_CK 3 9 FUM_CK
/FUMD 5 4 /FUM_D 4 7 /FUM_D
FUMLD 6 5 FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
FGOUT 3 (NC)
FUM
WEBM
WEB-END
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
1 N-HL(UW) 1
PCU PWB
1
6 TH_MY
TS_UM 4
3
TS_US
6 HL PWB
CN2
TH_US (NC)
1
2
N-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(COM)
2 3
CN3
L-HL(COM)
1 L-HL(COM)
2 N-HL(UW)
3 N-HL(SUB)
1 L-HL(COM) 1 (Power) CN4 CN12
3
2
L-HL(COM)
L-HL(COM)
3
2 6 4
6
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(UW)
4
6
INT24V1
GND2
6
5
2
4
INT24V1
GND2
/HL_PR 1 6 /HL_PR
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW 2 1
2
N-HL(MAIN)
N-HL(SUB)
1
2 HLout_UM 2 8 HLout_UM
5 L-HL(COM) 5 HLout_US 4 10 HLout_US
3 (NC) 3 HLout_UW 3 14 HLout_UW
(Connector) CN16
1 GND2 1 B-9 GND2 B-1 1 GND2 1 5 GND2
2 TH_US_IN 2 B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 2 TH_US_IN 2 7 TH_US_IN
3 GND2 3 B-7 (NC) B-3 3 (NC) 3 (NC) 6 GND2
4 TH_MY_IN 4 B-6 (NC) B-4 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 8 TH_E_IN
B-5 GND2 B-5 5 GND2 5 9 GND2
B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 6 TH_MY_IN 6 10 TH_MY_IN
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 7 (NC) 7 (NC) 13 GND2
1 WEB-END 1 B-2 WEB-END B-8 8 WEB-END 8 11 WEB-END
2 GND2 2 B-1 GND2 B-9 9 GND2 9 12 GND2
CN14
1 WEB_M1out 1 18 WEBMAout 18 19 WEBMAout
2 WEB_M2out 2 19 WEBMBout 19 20 WEBMBout
PCU FUM
The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with three heater lamps,
which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper.
The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber because of
the following reasons and purpose.
1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating) is
of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed to
separate paper upward.)
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
deformation.
WEB-END
WEB-END
c
a
b
Parts
a Thermostat (main)
b Thermostat (sub)
c Heater lamp
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
ADUMH
CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
GND2
5VLED1
2
3
2
3
GND2
5VLED1
5
4
2
3
GND2
5VLED1
4
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
GND2 5 5 GND2 2 1 POD3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 GND2
DSW_ADU 7 3 5VLED4
GND2 8 5
5VLED2
APPD1
9
10
1
2
DSW_ADU
GND2 POD3
GND2 11 3 5VLED2
5VLED5 12
1
2
APPD1
GND2
3
2
1
2
APPD1
GND2
TFD3
3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5
CN3
APPD2
GND2
4
5
1
2
APPD2
GND2
ADUGS
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10
1 24V1B 1 ADUML
2 /ADUGS 2
RIGHT DOOR CN10 3
I/F PWB 14
15
/ADUGS
24V1B
14
15
3
1
SGUDA/
B1V42
CN1 CN6
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
SIN3
SELIN2
3
5
2
3
SIN3
SELIN2
2
3
11
7
SIN3
SELIN2
APPD1
APPD1
MPFD
7
11
4
5
APPD1
MPFD
4
5
12
8
APPD1
MPFD
DSW_ADU
MPWD 13 6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD
GND2 2 17 GND2 17 15 GND2
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1
SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 14 APPD2
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 10 POD3
5VN 16 22 5VN 22 3 5VN 1
PCU PWB
MOTOR DRIVER PWB
CN4 CN17
ADUMHB 14 3 ADUMHB
ADUMHA 25 4 ADUMHA
ADUMHXB 16 5 ADUMHXB
ADUMHXA 23 6 ADUMHXA
POMCNT
ADUMHCNT
11
21
7
8
POMCNT
ADUMHCNT 2
POMB 17 9 POMB
POMA 15 10 POMA
POMXB 19 11 POMXB
POMXA 13 12 POMXA
ADUMLB 26 13 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 22 14 ADUMLA
ADUMLXB 24 15 ADUMLXB
ADUMLXA 20 16 ADUMLXA
RRMCNT 1 17 RRMCNT
ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
RRMB 7 19 RRMB
RRMA 5 20 RRMA
RRMXB 9 21 RRMXB
RRMXA 3 22 RRMXA
PFMB
PFMA
10
8
23
24
PFMB
PFMA
APPD2
PFMXB 12 25 PFMXB
PFMXA 6 26 PFMXA
GND2 2 (NC) (NC) 27 PFM2CNT
PFMCNT 4 28 PFMCNT
CN3
ADUML24V 1 2 ADUML24V
ADUML24V 2 5 ADUML24V
ADUMLB/ 3 3 ADUMLB/
ADUMLB// 4 6 ADUMLB//
ADUMLA// 5 4 ADUMLA//
ADUMLA/ 6 1 ADUMLA/
CN3
ADUMHA// 11 21 ADUMHA// 21 1 ADUMHA//
ADUMHA/ 12 22 ADUMHA/ 22 4 ADUMHA/
ADUMHB/ 9 23 ADUMHB/ 23 6 ADUMHB/
ADUMHB// 10 24 ADUMHB// 24 3 ADUMHB//
ADUMH24V 7 25 ADUMH24V 25 2 ADUMH24V
ADUMH24V 8 26 ADUMH24V 26 5 ADUMH24V
NC 13
PCU PWB
CN14
12 24V1B_OSM
5 24V1B_OSM 5 1 24V1B_OSM 1 15 /OSMXB
1 /OSMXB 1 2 /OSMXB 2 16 /OSMXA
2 /OSMXA 2 3 /OSMXA 3 13 /OSMB
3 /OSMB 3 4 /OSMB 4 14 /OSMA
4 /OSMA 4 5 /OSMA 5 CN15
6 POFM1_V 6 23 POFM1_V
7 /POFM1_CNT 7 25 /POFM1_CNT
4 POFM1_LD 4 8 POFM1_LD 8 27 POFM1_LD
3 GND2 3 9 POFM2_LD 9 28 POFM2_LD
2 /POFM1_CNT 2 10 (NC) 10 (NC) 2 GND2
1 POFM1_V 1 11 GND2 11 29 GND2
12 5VN 12 7 5VN
13 TFD2 13 3 TFD2
4 POFM2_LD 4 14 POD2 14 4 POD2
3 GND2 3 15 HPOS 15 5 HPOS
2 /POFM1_CNT 2 16 POD1 16 6 POD1
1 POFM1_V 1 17 GND2 17 1 GND2
TFD2 5VN
TFD2
3
2
HPOS GND2 1
5VN 1
POD2 2
GND2 3
5VN 1
HPOS 2
GND2 3
5VN 1
POD1 2
GND2 3
OSM
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC) 1
(NC) 7
(NC) 4
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
#
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
#
#
#
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
POFM_1
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
4
5
6
4
2
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
POFM_3 3 GND2 3 18 GND2
1 2
1
POFM3_LD
POFM3_V
2
1
20
22
POFM3_LD
POFM3_V
POFM_2
A. Duplex
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
• When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
• By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
• The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position. 2) Remove the right door unit.
• Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
• When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
charged to the right tray.
Parts
a RD I/F PWB 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
b Manual paper feed clutch
c ADU gate solenoid
a b
c f
1) Remove the upper cabinet right and the right connecting cabi-
A
net. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the fusing unit. [Refer to "[L] FUSING SECTION."]
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector.
B
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear.
B A
Parts
a ADU motor lower
a
d
e c
Parts
a Drum motor
b Resist motor
c Toner supply clutch
d Separation solenoid
e Temperature/humidity sensor (1) Drum motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover. 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
drum motor.
Conduction
grease
5) Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and remove the
temperature/humidity sensor. Disconnect the connector from
the temperature/humidity sensor.
d
e b
c
f
Parts
a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) (3) Paper tray lift-up motor
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
f Paper transport clutch [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover. 2) Open the control box.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
2) Open the control box. the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive
unit.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
8) Remove the gear, and remove the paper transport clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
h
b
a g
e
i
f
c
DIMM1
About 15
A
A A
[ Normal ]
A A
B B
5) Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and
the PROG2 ROM PWB (B).
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
A B
Parts
a AC power PWB
(4) PCU PWB
b DC power PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. (1) AC power PWB
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
the PCU PWB. 2) Remove the screw, the reactor (200V only) and disconnect the
connector, and remove the AC power PWB.
• 100V series
• 200V series
1
(2) DC power PWB (1) SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, the reactor and the AC cord unit and dis- [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
connect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit. 2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
2
1
3) Remove the securing screws and slide out the scanner PWB.
Disconnect the connector.
MX-283 N
1
MX-M363/M453/M503 N
MX-M363/M453/M503 U
MX-M282/M362/M452/M502 N
C. Others
a
b
c
d e
Parts
a SCN Flash ROM PWB
b Scanner control PWB
c HL PWB
d Motor drive PWB
e HV PWB (High voltage PWB)
(2) HL PWB
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the HL PWB.
NG NG
The clearance
must be about 1mm.
OK
The clearance
must be about 2mm.
OK
NG NG
a
e
f
d
c
b
Parts
a Ozone fan
b Power cooling fan 1
c Power cooling fan 2
d MFP PWB cooling fan
e Paper exit cooling fan 3
f LSU cooling fan
(2) Power cooling fan 1 3) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power
unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the clamp. Disconnect the
connector and remove the screw, and remove the power cool-
ing fan 1.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and
arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with
the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate.
A
4) Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan 2.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
(3) Power cooling fan 2 harness (B) facing upward.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, the reactor (200V only) and disconnect the
connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.
• 100V series
A
• 200V series
1
A
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the MFP PWB cooling fan.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
c b
a
Parts
a Main switch 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
b Front door open/close switch the right door open/close switch cover unit.
c Right door open/close switch
ON
W B Harness color
Switch position W W
Connector color
R R
OFF
Example:
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag